cisco business edition 4000 partner guide · contents chapter 1 new and changed information 1...

246
Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide First Published: 2017-04-21 Last Modified: 2020-01-14 Americas Headquarters Cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA http://www.cisco.com Tel: 408 526-4000 800 553-NETS (6387) Fax: 408 527-0883

Upload: others

Post on 12-Mar-2020

4 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner GuideFirst Published: 2017-04-21

Last Modified: 2020-01-14

Americas HeadquartersCisco Systems, Inc.170 West Tasman DriveSan Jose, CA 95134-1706USAhttp://www.cisco.comTel: 408 526-4000

800 553-NETS (6387)Fax: 408 527-0883

Page 2: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS,INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.

THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITHTHE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY,CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.

The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB's public domain version ofthe UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.

NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHERWARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS" WITH ALL FAULTS.CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.

IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUTLIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERSHAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses and phone numbers used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses and phone numbers. Any examples, command display output, networktopology diagrams, and other figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses or phone numbers in illustrative content is unintentionaland coincidental.

All printed copies and duplicate soft copies of this document are considered uncontrolled. See the current online version for the latest version.

Cisco has more than 200 offices worldwide. Addresses and phone numbers are listed on the Cisco website at www.cisco.com/go/offices.

Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this URL: www.cisco.comgo trademarks. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and anyother company. (1721R)

© 2017–2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Page 3: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

C O N T E N T S

New and Changed Information 1C H A P T E R 1

New and Changed Information 1

Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25C H A P T E R 2

Introduction to Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Workflow 25

Getting Started with a BE4000 Customer Site 27

BE4000 Architecture and Design Considerations 31C H A P T E R 3

BE4000 Customer Network Requirements 31

BE4000 Management Tunnel 31

DHCP Server 32

BE4000 in Voice VLANs 32

BE4000 Deployment Overview 33

BE4000 Single-Site Deployment 33

BE4000 Intersite Dialing 34

BE4000 Sites in Mesh Topology 35

BE4000 Sites in Star Topology 38

Remote User in a BE4000 Network 38

PSTN Connectivity in BE4000 39

BE4000 SIP Trunk Connectivity 39

Using the BE4000 Main Interface for SIP Trunk Connectivity 41

Using the BE4000 Secondary Interface for SIP Trunk and External Media 42

Wireless Local Area Network Requirements 42

Pre-Staging BE4000 43

Subnets Not Supported by BE4000 44

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guideiii

Page 4: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Set up a Customer Site 45C H A P T E R 4

Request Access to the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal 45

Add Partner Users for Accessing the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal 47

Access Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal 47

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal Dashboard 48

Collect BE4000 Customer Network Requirements 49

Add a BE4000 Customer Site in Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal 51

Redeploy the BE4000 Site 52

Replace a Faulty BE4000 Appliance 52

Flag the Faulty BE4000 Appliance for RMA 53

Deploy the RMA Replacement BE4000 Appliance 53

Deploy a Customer Site 55C H A P T E R 5

Local Administration 55

Console Based Local Administration 55

Ethernet based Connectivity for BE4000 Local Administration 56

Run Port Check Tool 58

Deploy a Customer Site 58

Deploy a Customer Site—Software Updates Through Internet 58

Deploy a Customer Site—Software Updates Through USB 59

Add Cisco Wireless IP Phone 8821 to the Wireless LAN 60

Provision the Phone 61

Troubleshooting Phone Provisioning 62

Manage Your Site 63C H A P T E R 6

View Status of the BE4000 Appliance 64

Troubleshoot the Status of BE4000 64

Share the Configuration Details of a BE4000 Site 66

Modify the Customer Site After Deployment 66

Configure Intersite Dialing—Mesh Topology 67

Intersite Dialing - Field Descriptions for Mesh Topology 68

Configure Intersite Dialing—Star Topology 68

Intersite Dialing - Field Descriptions for Star Topology 69

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guideiv

Contents

Page 5: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Configuration Templates 70

Create a Configuration Template from an Existing BE4000 Site 70

Line Cards 71

Add a Line Card 71

Line Card - Field Descriptions 72

Edit a Line Card 81

Private Line Automatic Ringdown 81

Configure Private Line Automatic Ringdown 82

Troubleshoot the Status of Line Cards 82

SIP Trunk 85

Add SIP Trunk 86

Remove SIP Trunk 86

Manage Trusted IP Address List 87

Supported Codecs 87

Priority Order of Codecs 88

Modify Codec List and Set Priority 88

Troubleshooting BE4000 Issues 88

Run Show Commands 89

Run Debug Commands 90

Overview of Auto Attendant 90

Add Auto Attendant 91

Auto Attendant - Field Descriptions 91

Enable Users to Update Auto Attendant Greeting and Prompts 93

Auto Attendant Prompts 93

Modify Auto Attendant Prompts from a Phone 94

Alternate Greeting 95

Add Auto Attendant Alternate Greeting from a Phone 95

Modify Auto Attendant Alternate Greeting from a Phone 96

Delete Auto Attendant Alternate Greeting from a Phone 97

Change Business Hours 98

Phone Branding 99

Overview of Users 99

Add a User 100

User Management - Field Descriptions 100

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guidev

Contents

Page 6: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Modify Email Address of a User 105

Resend Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal Registration Email to a User 106

Resend Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal Registration Email to All Users 106

Reset Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal Password for a User 107

Reset Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal Password for All Users 107

Delete a User 107

Extensions 108

Add an Extension 108

Extensions - Field Descriptions 109

Add Extensions in Bulk 114

Import Stations - Field Descriptions 115

Modify an Extension 116

Shared Line 117

Phones 117

Add a New Phone 118

Phones - Field Descriptions 118

Provision the Phone Using Extension Assigner 120

Troubleshooting Phone Provisioning 121

Monitor Phones That Are Unregistered 121

Access Admin Settings on Phone 121

View Phone Firmware Version and IP Address 122

Replace a Phone 122

Reassign Phone to a Different User 122

Reset Phone 123

Reset Phone from the BE4000 Portal 123

Reset All Phones from the BE4000 Portal 123

Reset Phone Using Phone Softkeys 124

Add a Key Expansion Module 124

Add a Key Expansion Module on the BE4000 Portal 125

Connect a Key Expansion Module to a Cisco IP Phone 125

Conference 125

Built-In Bridge 125

Hardware Conference 125

Ad-Hoc Conference 126

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guidevi

Contents

Page 7: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Meet-me Conference 126

Meet-Me Conference Dependency on Codecs 126

Enable Hardware Conference 126

Privacy and Privacy Button 127

Barge 128

Enterprise Line Key 128

Cisco IP Phone 8800 Series with Enterprise Line Key 128

Enable Enterprise Line Key 130

Private IP Address Ranges 130

Personal Voicemail Box 131

Set Up Personal Voicemail Box for a User 131

Personal Voicemail Box - Field Descriptions 131

Access Personal Voicemail Box 133

Set Up Personal Voicemail Box for a User Without an Assigned Phone 133

Access Personal Voicemail Box-Users Without an Assigned Phone 133

Reach System Operator from a Personal Voicemail Box 134

Configure System Operator Number 134

Configure Voicemail Description Style 135

Enable Voicemail Box Space Notification Emails 136

Group Voicemail Box 136

Add a Group Voicemail Box 137

Group Voicemail Box - Field Descriptions 137

Add Users to Group VoiceMail Box 139

Modify Owners of a Group Voicemail Box 139

Hunt Groups 139

Call Queuing 140

Add a New Hunt Group 140

Hunt Groups - Field Descriptions 141

Add Users to Hunt Groups 145

Night Service 145

Night Service Manual Activation Code 145

Configure Night Service 146

Activate Night Service 146

Designate an Extension for Night Service Hours 147

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guidevii

Contents

Page 8: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Designate an Extension to Receive Night Service Calls 147

Pickup Group 147

Create a Pickup Group 148

Answer a Pickup Group Call 148

Enable "Pickup Call" Check Box for an Extension 149

Call Park 149

Paging 150

Whisper Paging 150

Paging Group 150

Add a Paging Group 151

Modify a Paging Group 152

Delete a Paging Group 152

Intercom 152

Call Detail Records 153

Enable Collection of Call Detail Records 153

View Call History Report 154

Download Call History Report 154

View Busy Hours Report 155

View the Concurrent Calls Report 156

View Operator Report 156

Service Level Report 158

Disable Collection of Call Detail Records 158

Emergency Alerting 159

Add a Number for Emergency Alert Notification 159

Remove a Number from Emergency Alert Notification 159

Task Log 159

View Task Log 160

Cisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapters 161

Configure Cisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapter 161

Direct Inward Dial Numbers 163

Manage DID Numbers 164

Inbound Call Blocking 165

Add Numbers to Inbound Call Blocking List 165

Modify Music on Hold 166

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guideviii

Contents

Page 9: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Specify Maintenance Schedule 166

Configure Voicemail to Email 167

Configure Office 365 168

Configure a Connector 168

Add a domain and users to Office 365 173

Fetch MX FQDN Record 174

Add SMTP Server Details 174

Modify SMTP Server Details 175

Modify the Digit to Send Calls to Voicemail Automatically 177

Modify the Digit to Dial an Outside Line 177

Modify Time Zone 178

Smart License 178

Add Smart License Token 179

Configure Back Up Schedule for a Site 179

Restore the Backed-Up Site Configuration 180

Delete a Customer Site 181

Manually Reset to Factory Default 182

Console Based Factory Reset 182

Ethernet Based Factory Reset 184

Reload the BE4000 Appliance 185

Reset OTP 186

Reset OTP—Yourself 186

Reset OTP—From Another Partner User 186

Update Primary Contact Details 186

Add Secondary OTP Devices 187

Log In to the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal Using Recovery Code 188

Sign In to BE4000 Partner Portal Using a Secondary OTP Device 188

Manage Customer Administrators 189

Add Additional Customer Administrators 189

Change Customer Administrator for a BE4000 Site 189

Reset Password for a Customer Administrator OTP Account 190

Modify Customer Administrator's Phone Number 190

Remove Customer Administrator 191

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guideix

Contents

Page 10: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Setup Assistant 193A P P E N D I X A

Add Customer Field Descriptions 193

Connectivity Field Descriptions 194

Dial Plan Field Descriptions 219

Stations Field Descriptions 221

Call Routing Field Descriptions 223

Features Field Descriptions 233

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guidex

Contents

Page 11: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

C H A P T E R 1New and Changed Information

• New and Changed Information, on page 1

New and Changed InformationTable 1: New and Changed Information—2020

UpdatesRevision Date

• Updated the following sections:

• Smart License—Updated information on the smart licensestatus available for your BE4000 site.

• Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal Dashboard—Updated information about the columnLicense that displaysSmart License Status.

January 14, 2020

Table 2: New and Changed Information—2019

UpdatesRevision Date

• Updated the following sections:

• Smart License—Updated information on the smart licensestatus available for your BE4000 site.

• Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal Dashboard—Updated information about the columnLicense that displaysSmart License Status.

January 14, 2020

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide1

Page 12: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

• Added the following section:

• Cisco IP Phone 8800 Series with Enterprise Line Key, on page128

• Updated the following sections:

• Direct Inward Dial Numbers, on page 163—Updatedinformation on the option to define the name that appears ascaller ID for outbound calls.

• Direct Inward Dial Numbers, on page 163—Updated that theinbound call mapping of DID to Meet Me is reset to defaultwhen hardware conferencing is disabled.

October 1, 2019

• Updated the following sections:

• Direct Inward Dial Numbers, on page 163—Updatedinformation on the option to map Direct Inward Dial (DID)inbound call with Meet Me conference number.

• Direct Inward Dial Numbers, on page 163 and Add a LineCard , on page 71—Updated information on the option tomake Outbound Caller ID editable and having a differentformat from inbound Direct Inward Dial (DID) numbers.

• Shared Line, on page 117—Updated information on therequirements to uncheck the shared line check box.

• System Settings Field Descriptions, on page 195—Deleted theinformation on Demo Slider based on removal of featuresupport.

August 27, 2019

• Added the following sections:

• Enable Enterprise Line Key, on page 130—Updatedinformation on how to enable Enterprise Line Key (ELK).ELK is not enabled by default on BE4000.

• Updated the following sections:

• Deploy the RMA Replacement BE4000 Appliance, on page53—Updated troubleshooting information for a scenario inwhich the configuration of RMA replacement appliance fails.

July 30, 2019

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide2

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 13: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

• Added the following sections:

• Enterprise Line Key, on page 128

• Enable Voicemail Box Space Notification Emails, on page136

• Phone Branding , on page 99

• Configure Voicemail Description Style, on page 135

• Updated the following sections:

• Emergency Alerting , on page 159—Removed the restrictionon feature availability, as Emergency Alerting is nowsupported.

• Call Detail Records , on page 153—Removed the restrictionon feature availability, as Emergency Alerting is nowsupported.

• PSTN Connectivity in BE4000, on page 39—Updated withthe restriction that you cannot configure a combinatiin of BRIand PRI cards on the BE4000 appliance.

• Auto Attendant, on page 229 and Auto Attendant - FieldDescriptions, on page 91—Removed the Repeat This Menuoption from Auto Attendant.

• Auto Attendant, on page 229 and Auto Attendant - FieldDescriptions, on page 91—Added a note that the default AutoAttendant audio prompts are silent.

June 18, 2019

• Added the following sections:

• Configure Intersite Dialing—Star Topology

• Reset OTP

• Redeploy the BE4000 Site

• Updated the following sections:

• Flag the Faulty BE4000 Appliance for RMA—Updated stepsfor the new menu option Replace/Reset.

• Extensions - Field Descriptions, on page 109—Updated thefield descriptions to include drop-down list fields to add andmodify an extension.

March 28, 2019

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide3

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 14: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

• Added the following section:

• Smart License, on page 178

• Updated the following section:

• Cisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapters, on page161—Updated the content from being specific to Cisco ATA190 Analog Telephone Adapter to generic to Cisco ATAAnalog Telephone Adapters.

• Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194 and Line Card- Field Descriptions, on page 72—Updated the fielddescriptions to include "Name" and "Number" fields.

February 13, 2019

• Added the following sections:

• Conference, on page 125

• Barge, on page 128

• Manage Customer Administrators, on page 189

• Updated the following section:

• Extensions - Field Descriptions, on page 109—Updated fielddescriptions of "COR" field.

January 24, 2019

• Added Access Personal Voicemail Box, on page 133 section.

• Removed the occurences of Cisco Planning, Design &Implementation (PDI) Technical Advisor (TA).

January 11, 2019

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide4

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 15: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Table 3: New and Changed Information—2018

UpdatesRevision Date

• Added the following sections:

• Priority Order of Codecs, on page 88

• Modify Codec List and Set Priority, on page 88

• Updated the following sections:

• Call Routing Field Descriptions, on page 223 and HuntGroups - Field Descriptions, on page 141—Updated toincludeEnable Call Queuing check box and reorganizedComfort Greeting frequency and Max Waiting Timefields.

• Extensions - Field Descriptions, on page109—Interchanged the "Single Number Reach (SNR)"and "Call Forward" field descriptions.

December 12, 2018

• Added the following sections:

• BE4000 Intersite Dialing , on page 34

• Configure Intersite Dialing—Mesh Topology, on page 67

• Add Extensions in Bulk, on page 114

• Modify the Digit to Dial an Outside Line, on page 177

• Updated the following fields:

• Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194 and Line Card- Field Descriptions, on page 72—Updated the NIM-2FXOand NIM-4FXO field descriptions to include the new fieldsadded under "Show Advanced" check box.

• Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194—Updated "IPAddress or Domain Name" field to include the maximumnumber of characters that are allowed while adding a domainname.

• Hunt Groups - Field Descriptions, on page 141—Addedsuggestions for setting up the timers and removed defaultvalues from the timer fields.

• Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194—Reordered the"System Settings" field descriptions. Now, "System Settings"field descriptions appears after the "LAN Connections" fielddescriptions. Earlier, it was appearing under "Dial Plan" tab.

November 22, 2018

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide5

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 16: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

• Added the following sections:

• Privacy and Privacy Button, on page 127

• Inbound Call Blocking, on page 165

• View Phone Firmware Version and IP Address, on page 122

• Updated the following sections:

• Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194 and Line Card- Field Descriptions, on page 72—While configuring thepaging extension on for an FXO line card during the initialsite deployment and post site deployment, the "Name" fieldis renamed to "Label" and the "Number" field is renamed to"Extension"

• Extensions - Field Descriptions, on page 109—Added "Allowcalls to blocked numbers" check box.

• Personal Voicemail Box - Field Descriptions, on page131—Added "Enable MWI" check box.

• Phones - Field Descriptions, on page 118—Updated "Privacy"and "Privacy Button" field descriptions.

November 2, 2018

Moved Configure Voicemail to Email , on page 167 topic from "Set upa Customer Site" chapter to "Manage Your Site" chapter.

October 22, 2108

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide6

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 17: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

• Added the following section:

• Private IP Address Ranges, on page 130

• Updated the following sections:

• Connectivity FieldDescriptions, on page 194—Added "PrivateIP Ranges".

• Extensions - Field Descriptions, on page 109—Added "EnableVM to Email" and "Enable MWI" check boxes.

• UserManagement - Field Descriptions, on page 100—Added"Enable VM to Email" and "Enable MWI" check boxes.

• Personal Voicemail Box - Field Descriptions, on page131—Added "Enable VM to Email" check box.

• Call Routing Field Descriptions, on page 223 andHunt Groups- Field Descriptions, on page 141—Renamed "Disconnect"option to "Disconnect Call".

• Call Routing Field Descriptions, on page 223 and ReachSystem Operator from a Personal Voicemail Box, on page134—Updated field descriptions.

• Call Routing Field Descriptions, on page 223 and AutoAttendant - Field Descriptions, on page 91—Updated fielddescriptions.

• Call Routing FieldDescriptions, on page 223 andNight ServiceManual ActivationCode, on page 145—Updated theminimumand maximum digit range for "Manual Activation Code".

October 11, 2018

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide7

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 18: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

• Added the following sections:

• Task Log, on page 159

• Call Queuing , on page 140

• Updated the following sections:

• Access Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal, onpage 47, Add Secondary OTPDevices, on page 187, and LogIn to the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management PortalUsing Recovery Code, on page 188—Changed the "RescueCode" to "Recovery Code".

• Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194 and Line Card- Field Descriptions, on page 72—Added "Input Gain (db)"and "Output Attenuation (db)" fields.

• Share the Configuration Details of a BE4000 Site, on page66—Removed the note that configuration summary is notreal time. Also, removed the option to export configurationsummary by email.

• Hunt Groups - Field Descriptions, on page 141—Updated thefield names to be in sync with that of the Setup Assistant "HuntGroups" page. Added "Comfort Greeting frequency (30-120Sec)" and "Max Waiting Time (20-3600 Sec)" fields.

• Extensions - Field Descriptions, on page 109—Added the"Extension Label" field.

• Phones, on page 117—Added a note.

• BE4000Management Tunnel, on page 31—Updated the note.

September 20, 2018

Private Line Automatic Ringdown , on page 81—Added a note thatPLAR is not supported on ATA FXS ports.

September 5, 2018

Added the following section:

• Private Line Automatic Ringdown , on page 81

August 23, 2018

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide8

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 19: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

Updated the following sections:

• Personal Voicemail Box, on page 131—Updated the instances of"Personal Mailbox" to "Personal Voicemail Box".

• Group Voicemail Box, on page 136

• Updated the instances of "Group Mailbox" to "GroupVoicemail Box".

• Added a note to "Primary Extension" field description.

• Extensions - Field Descriptions, on page 109—Renamed "NightService" field to "CFNS Number" and moved it under "AdditionalSettings" table.

• Call Routing Field Descriptions, on page 223 and Hunt Groups -Field Descriptions, on page 141:

• Updated "When No Member is Available" drop-down list.

• Added "Member Timeout" field.

• Removed "Max Waiting Time' field.

• Troubleshooting BE4000 Issues , on page 88—Renamed thefollowing:

• "Phone Number" drop-down option to "DID Translation".

• "Ccsip" check box to "SIP Signaling".

• "Cdapi" check box to "Call Routing".

• Configuration Templates , on page 70—Added Partner level andCustomer level template details.

• Phones, on page 117—Removed the following section:

• Restart Phone from the BE4000 Portal.

August 21, 2018

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide9

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 20: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

• The following sections are added:

• Reset All Phones from the BE4000 Portal, on page 123

• Paging Group, on page 150

• Shared Line, on page 117

• Log In to the Cisco Business Edition 4000Management PortalUsing Recovery Code, on page 188

• Updated the following sections:

• Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194 and Add SIPTrunk , on page 86—Added a note in "SIP Trunk" section.

• Deploy a Customer Site—Software Updates Through USB,on page 59 and Deploy a Customer Site—Software UpdatesThrough Internet, on page 58—Added guidelines for addingserial number.

• Extensions - Field Descriptions, on page 109—Updated thefield description for "Shared Line" check box.

• Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194—Updated thefield descriptions for the "Line Cards" page.

August 3, 2018

Updated the BE4000 Deployment Overview, on page 33 section.July 19, 2018

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide10

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 21: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

• Added the following sections:

• Manage Trusted IP Address List , on page 87

• Updated the following sections:

• Auto Attendant - Field Descriptions, on page 91—Renamedthe Number of repeats through menu drop-down list toHow many times do you want message to be played andremoved "0" from the drop-down options.

• Modify SMTP Server Details , on page 175—Updated toinclude the steps to upload a custom SMTP server certificate.

• Configure BackUp Schedule for a Site, on page 179—Updatedthat the backup failure emails are sent only when the site isin the "Online" state.

• Extensions - Field Descriptions, on page 109—Updated the"Call Forward" section that you cannot call forward to thesame extension.

• Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194—Renamed theISP field to Internet Service Provider (ISP).

• Share the Configuration Details of a BE4000 Site, on page66—Added a note that the configuration summary is not realtime.

• Dial Plan Field Descriptions, on page 219—Preferencedrop-down list description is updated to include default values.

July 5, 2018

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide11

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 22: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

• Added the following section:

• Troubleshooting BE4000 Issues , on page 88

• Paging, on page 150

• Intercom , on page 152

• Call Park , on page 149

• Updated the following sections:

• Modify SMTP Server Details , on page 175 —Added detailson validating the SMTP server address

• Call Routing Field Descriptions, on page 223—Updated thecharacters allowed for the "Hunt Group Name" field

• Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194—Added a notefor "Proxy Address", "Outbound Proxy Address" and"Registrar Address" fields

• Deploy the RMA Replacement BE4000 Appliance, on page53—Updated prerequisites

June 19, 2018

Added the following section:

• Reset Phone, on page 123

May 29, 2018

Updated the following:

• Call Routing Field Descriptions, on page 223—Updated the "GroupName" field description to include a maximum of 12 characters.

• Stations Field Descriptions, on page 221—Updated the "DisplayName" field description to include a maximum of 12 characters.

• Extensions - Field Descriptions, on page 109—

• Updated the "Display Name" field description to include amaximum of 12 characters.

• The text "SNR" is changed to "Single Number Reach (SNR)".

• Phones - Field Descriptions, on page 118—Updated the "DeviceName" field description to include a maximum of 12 characters.

• Group Voicemail Box - Field Descriptions, on page 137—Updatedthe "Group Name" field description to include a maximum of 12characters.

May 24, 2018

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide12

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 23: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

• Added the following sections:

• SIP Trunk , on page 85—Ability to add or remove SIP Trunkpost site deployment.

• Access Admin Settings on Phone, on page 121

• Reach System Operator from a Personal Voicemail Box, onpage 134

• Updated the following sections:

• Call Routing FieldDescriptions, on page 223 andDirect InwardDial Numbers, on page 163—Added the drop-down option"Greeting Admin" for Auto Attendant target type in the"Inbound Call Mapping" page.

• Call Routing Field Descriptions, on page 223 and ChangeBusiness Hours , on page 98—Added a note that holidayscan be added only the current year and a year ahead.

• Call Routing Field Descriptions, on page 223 and AutoAttendant - Field Descriptions, on page 91—Added submenuoption for Auto Attendant closed menu.

• Extensions - Field Descriptions, on page 109—Added a noteon adding a phone while adding extension.

• Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194 and ModifySMTP Server Details , on page 175—Added a note onDomainName requirements while SMTP Server details.

May 11, 2018

• Added the following topics:

• Cisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapters, on page 161

• Call Detail Records , on page 153

• Emergency Alerting , on page 159

• Edit a Line Card , on page 81—Removed the note stating thelimitation on changing the NIM cards from T1 PRI card E1 PRIand conversely.

• Call Routing Field Descriptions, on page 223

• Added "Dynamic Members" support details

• Added "Drop Through Destination" support details

April 12, 2018

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide13

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 24: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

• AddedModify the Digit to Send Calls to Voicemail Automatically,on page 177

• Phones - Field Descriptions, on page 118—Added a note for "Type"filed description under Buttons

• Call Routing Field Descriptions, on page 223—Added a note for"Pilot Number" field description under Hunt Groups

• Troubleshoot the Status of Line Cards , on page 82—Updated theimages

March 21, 2018

• Added Add Partner Users for Accessing the Cisco Business Edition4000 Management Portal, on page 47

• Added Wireless Local Area Network Requirements , on page 42

• Reorganized the Deploy a Customer Site, on page 58 section toinclude procedure for deploying the BE4000 using a USB stick

March 12, 2018

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide14

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 25: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

March 2, 2018

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide15

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 26: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

• Added Add Cisco Wireless IP Phone 8821 to the Wireless LAN,on page 60

• Dial Plan Field Descriptions, on page 219—The following changesare made to "Dial Plans" page:

• "COR" field is made editable and the following drop-downoptions are added:

• call-emergency

• call-internal

• call-toll-free

• call-local

• call-local-plus

• call-national

• call-national-plus

• call-international

• "Preference" column is made editable and the followingdrop-down options are added:

• POTSthenSIP

• SIPthenPOTS

• SIPOnly

• POTSOnly

• Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194—The followingchanges are made to "SIP Trunks > Proxy Settings" page:

• "Proxy Address and Port" is renamed to "Proxy Address"

• "Port Number" field is renamed to "Proxy Port"

• "Outbound Proxy Address and Port" field is renamed to"Outbound Proxy Address"

• "Port Number" field is renamed to "Outbound Proxy Port"

• The following drop-down options are added to the "FaxTransmission Protocol" field:

• T.38 fall back to G.711 u-law

• T.38 fall back to G.711 a-law

• "Min-SE" text box is added

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide16

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 27: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

• "Session Expires" text box is added

• "Options Ping" toggle is added

• "Service Up Interval" text box is added

• "Service Down Interval" text box is added

• "Retries" text box is added

• Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194—The followingchanges are made to "SIP Trunks > Registrar Settings" page:

• "Configure via DHCP" radio button is added

• "Configure address and port" radio button is added

• "Registrar Address and Port" is renamed to "RegistrarAddress"

• "Port Number" is renamed to "Registrar Port"

• "Authentication Realm" text box is added

• Added the following topic:

• Modify Customer Administrator's Phone Number, on page190

• Call Routing Field Descriptions, on page 223—The followingchanges were made to Hunt Groups fields:

• "Number to Access Hunt" field is renamed to "Pilot Number"

• "Max Number of Callers Allowed in Queue" field is removed

• "Extension" column in the Hunt Group summary table isrenamed to "Pilot"

• "When No Member is Available" radio button is changed toa drop-down list.

• Hunt Groups - Field Descriptions, on page 141—The followingchanges are made:

• "Second Pilot Number" field is removed

• "Preference" field is removed

• "Collect Statistics" field is removed

• "Description" field is removed

• "Phone Display" field is removed

• "Timeout" is renamed to "Max Wait Time (10-60000 Sec)"

February 8, 2018

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide17

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 28: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

Updated the BE4000 Deployment Overview, on page 33 with thefollowing information:

• Requirement to enable port forwarding when using Port AddressTranslation (PAT)

• Requirement for IP Phones and BE4000 to be on the same networkfor features such as Phone Paging, Intercom, and Music On Holdto be supported.

February 5, 2018

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide18

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 29: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

UpdatesRevision Date

• Added the following topic:

• Replace a Faulty BE4000 Appliance, on page 52

• Local Administration, on page 55—Updated to show the newstatus script options.

• Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194—Added "Static TEI"field and updated SIP Trunks field descriptions.

• Extensions - Field Descriptions, on page 109—Removed thefollowing non-functional fields:

• "After Hour" check box

• "Voice Hunt Groups" check box

• "Refer" check box

• "Preference" field

• "Hunt Stop" check box and its associated "Channel" field

• "Session Server" check box and its associated "Session Server"field

• Phones - Field Descriptions, on page 118—Removed the followingnon-functional fields:

• "After Hour Exempt" check box

• "Camera" check box

• "Application" field

• "Group Phone" drop-down list

• "Emergency Response Location" field

• "Lpcor" drop-down list

• "Park" filed

• "Preference" drop-down list

• Registration Timer—"Max Value(120-86400)" and "MinValue(60-3600)" fields

• Incoming Details—"Enable" check box

• Conference Details—"Type" drop-down list

• "Extension Mobility" check box

January 24, 2018

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide19

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 30: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Table 4: New and Changed Information—2017

• Added the following topics:

• Add a User , on page 100

• Modify Email Address of a User , on page 105

• Resend Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal Registration Email to a User ,on page 106

• Resend Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal Registration Email to All Users, on page 106

• Reset Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal Password for a User , on page 107

• Reset Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal Password for All Users , on page107

• Modify SMTP Server Details , on page 175

• Modify Time Zone, on page 178

• Add Smart License Token, on page 179

• Deploy a Customer Site—Software Updates Through USB, on page 59

• Removed "Automatic Synchronization" field details from the Connectivity FieldDescriptions, on page 194.

December 20,2017

• Added the following topics:

• Troubleshoot the Status of Line Cards , on page 82

• Configure Voicemail to Email , on page 167

• Updated the BE4000 Deployment Overview, on page 33 to indicate that the BE4000must be deployed behind NAT.

December 11,2017

The following sections are updated:

• Pickup Group—Updated the content for answering a Pickup Group call

• Overview of Auto Attendant , on page 90—Added the content for editing the promptsfrom a phone and updated the content for adding alternate greeting from a phone

• Night Service, on page 145—Updated to include its own schedule

• Change Business Hours , on page 98—Removed the depending of business hourson night service

• Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194—Updated the drop-down list for ISDNType

November 28,2017

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide20

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 31: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• Added the following sections:

• Add a Line Card , on page 71

• Edit a Line Card , on page 81

• Modify Music on Hold, on page 166

• The "Primary DID" fieldname is renamed as "Default Outbound DID" in the CallRouting Field Descriptions, on page 223 section.

• The Music On Hold field description in the Features Field Descriptions, on page233 section is updated to include support for .au file format and filename conventions.

• The "Provider Digits" field is moved from the Line Cards (ISDN trunk) page in theSetup Assistant to Manage Site > Direct Inward Dial Numbers page.

November 7,2017

Added the following sections:

• Configure Back Up Schedule for a Site, on page 179

• Restore the Backed-Up Site Configuration, on page 180

October 27, 2017

• Added the following sections:

• Overview of Auto Attendant , on page 90

• Night Service, on page 145

• Direct Inward Dial Numbers, on page 163

• BE4000 SIP Trunk Connectivity, on page 39—Added the information that a partnershould provide to expedite the new SIP service provider on boarding process

• BE4000 Management Tunnel, on page 31—Updated to include ICMP access toSEA (208.115.101.160/27) and DFW (4.16.236.34/27) servers as a requirement

October 18, 2017

Added the following sections:

• Getting Started with a BE4000 Customer Site, on page 27

• Add a Key Expansion Module , on page 124

September 21,2017

Added the following sections:

• Specify Maintenance Schedule, on page 166

• Change Business Hours , on page 98

• Run Port Check Tool, on page 58

September 13,2017

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide21

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 32: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• Added the following sections:

• Reset Password for a Customer Administrator OTP Account, on page 190

• Add Secondary OTP Devices, on page 187

• Update Primary Contact Details, on page 186

• Change Business Hours , on page 98

• Introduction to Cisco Business Edition 4000, on page 25 is updated to includeinformation on Cisco Planning, Design & Implementation (PDI) Technical Advisorteam availability for the BE4000.

• Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal Dashboard, on page 48 is updatedto include Created By column

• Setup Assistant, on page 193 is updated with the following:

• Added field descriptions for Business Hours, Night Service, and MaintenanceSchedule

• A maximum of 15 characters allowed for Customer Name and Location onAdd Customer page

• Option to choose the type of user on the Stations page—User or Public

• Updated the default values shown on the Line Cards page

• BE4000 Management Tunnel, on page 31 is updated to include DNS, HTTP, andHTTPS requirements

September 6,2017

• Updated Provision the Phone , on page 61 with the following information:

• Password for accessing the administrator settings on the phone

• Support for DHCP Option 66

• Updated Setup Assistant, on page 193 with the following information to align withthe changes in Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Portal:

• "Outbound Proxy" field is now optional

• "Provider Template" field is added

July 20, 2017

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide22

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 33: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• Changed the book title from "Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Portal Guide" to"Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide"

• Reorganized the topics in the document based on end to end tasks performed by thepartner in deploying a customer site

• Added the following sections:

• BE4000 Customer Network Requirements, on page 31

• Reset OTP—From Another Partner User, on page 186

• BE4000 Customer Network Requirements, on page 31

• Local Administration, on page 55

• Setup Assistant, on page 193- contains field descriptions for Setup Assistantwizard

July 12, 2017

First Publish.April 24, 2017

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide23

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 34: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide24

New and Changed InformationNew and Changed Information

Page 35: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

C H A P T E R 2Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000

• Introduction to Cisco Business Edition 4000, on page 25• Cisco Business Edition 4000 Workflow, on page 25• Getting Started with a BE4000 Customer Site, on page 27

Introduction to Cisco Business Edition 4000Cisco Business Edition 4000 (BE4000) is a dedicated voice appliance that provides essential IP telephonyand voicemail services for up to 200 phones. BE4000 comprises of a BE4000 appliance that is installed inthe customer premises and the Cisco Business Edition 4000Management cloud portal that manages the phoneconfigurations.

A Cisco partner can preconfigure the customer network information in the Cisco Business Edition 4000Management portal even before the BE4000 appliance is shipped to the customer site. After the BE4000appliance is shipped and installed on the customer premises, it automatically pulls the preconfigured networkinformation from the portal. Thus deployment is made easy and phone systems are set up quickly.

BE4000 supports the Cisco IP Phone 7800 Series, Cisco IP Phone 8800 Series, and Cisco ATA 190 AnalogTelephone Adapter. For the list of supported phones, see Supported Phones.

You can connect to Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) by inserting the Cisco Network InterfaceModules (NIM). For the list of supported NIM cards, see Supported Line Cards.

The following portals are available as part of the Cisco Business Edition 4000:

• Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal (also referred to as Cisco Business Edition 4000Partner Portal) – Cisco Partners access this portal to preconfigure a customer’s network.

• Cisco Business Edition 4000 Selfcare Portal – Customer administrators access this portal to manage allthe Business Edition 4000 sites within their organization. End users access this portal to set up theirphone features from anywhere at any time.

For the latest features and enhancements available in the BE4000, see Release Notes.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 WorkflowThe following illustration outlines the high-level tasks that you perform to add and manage customer sites:

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide25

Page 36: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Figure 1: BE4000 Workflow

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide26

Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000Cisco Business Edition 4000 Workflow

Page 37: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Getting Started with a BE4000 Customer SiteTable 5: Getting Started with a BE4000 Customer Site

ReferencesPrerequisitePurposeTaskStep

Cisco BusinessEdition 4000Release Notes.

BE4000 PartnerSupportCenter—https://support.be4000.cisco.com.

—Be aware of theprerequisites andlimitations ofBE4000.

Read Cisco BusinessEdition 4000 ReleaseNotes and go throughthe BE4000 PartnerSupport Center.

Step 1

Read BE4000Architecture andDesignconsiderationschapter of theCiscoBusiness Edition4000 PartnerGuide.

—Be familiar with thenetwork requirementsand other designconsiderationsrequired for sitedeployment.

Understand theBE4000Architectureand DesignConsiderations

Step 2

PSS Portal—http:www.cisco.com gopss.

See Request Accessto BE4000 PartnerPortal section of theCisco BusinessEdition 4000Partner Guide fordetailed procedure.

• You must have avalid Cisco ID

• You must beassociated with aCisco Partner

You cannot accessBE4000 portal untilyour partneradministratorprovides you access.Log in to PartnerSelf-Service portal torequest access.

Request Access toBE4000 Portal

Step 3

• BE4000Portal—https://be4000.cisco.com.

• Read AccessBE4000 Portalsection of theCisco BusinessEdition 4000Partner Guidefor detailedprocedure.

• Partneradministrator hasprovided youaccess to BE4000in PSS portal

• You must have asmart phone or atablet with OneTime Password(OTP) generatorapplication

Register to theBE4000 Portal. Youcan create andconfigure a customersite in the BE4000portal.

Access BE4000Portal

Step 4

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide27

Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000Getting Started with a BE4000 Customer Site

Page 38: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

ReferencesPrerequisitePurposeTaskStep

Read CustomerContact andNetwork Detailssection of the CiscoBusiness Edition4000 Partner Guidefor detailedprocedure.

—You must collect thecustomer contactdetails and networkspecifications beforeadding a customersite in the portal.

Collect Customer andSite Details

Step 5

See Add CustomerSite section of theCisco BusinessEdition 4000Partner Guide fordetailed procedure.

Have customer contactand network detailsready

Create configurationfor the customer sitein the BE4000 portaland bring it to“Ready to Deploy”state.

Add customer site inthe BE4000 Portal

Step 6

—NIM card must beavailable on thecustomer site.

Based on thecustomerrequirements, insertappropriate NIMcards to connect tothe Public SwitchedTelephone Network(PSTN)

(Task performed onthe customer site)

(Optional) InsertNIM cards.

Step 8

See Access LocalAdministrationScreens section ofthe Cisco BusinessEdition 4000Partner Guide fordetailed procedure.

• BE4000 applianceis connected to thenetwork devicesand powered on.

• RJ45 or USBconsole cable forConsole basedconnection

• MGMT port (use anormal Cat5e orCat6 cable) cablefor Ethernet basedconnection

You must confirmthat you have all therequired connectionsbefore deploying thecustomer site. Youcan access localadministrationscreens throughEthernet or Console.

(Task performed onthe customer site)

Access LocalAdministrationscreens to verify ifBE4000 is connectedto the network

Step 9

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide28

Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000Getting Started with a BE4000 Customer Site

Page 39: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

ReferencesPrerequisitePurposeTaskStep

Port Checker—https://portcheck.be4000.cisco.com.

• Port Check toolmust be run onChrome, Firefox, orOpera browsersonly

• Your computermust be on thesame network asyour BE4000appliance

You must confirm ifthe UDP ports 500and 4500 areaccessible to theBE4000 portal.

Run Port CheckerStep 10

• BE4000deploysite—http://be4000.cisco.com/deploy.

• See Deploy aCustomer Sitesection of theCisco BusinessEdition 4000Partner Guidefor detailedprocedure.

• See CiscoBusinessEdition 4000Quick StartGuide.

• You have verifiedthe networkconnections byaccessing the localadministrationscreens

• You must have runthe Port Check Tooland verified UDPPorts are available

• Provisionedtelephony services

• A minimuminternet downloadspeed of 2 Mbps

• Customer Name,location, and serialnumber of theBE4000 applianceis ready

You must bring thesite configurationsthat you created inthe BE4000 portal onto the BE4000appliance.

You can deploy thesite in the followingways:

• Scan the QRcode on theunderside of theBE4000appliance andfollow theprompts

• Browse toBE4000 deploysite—http://be4000.cisco.com/deploy

Deploy the siteStep 11

BE4000Portal—https://be4000.cisco.com

Deployment issuccessfully completed.

Ensure that the site isup and running. Youcannot provision thephones if the site isnot in the Onlinestate.

Verify that the site isin the online on theBE4000 Portal

Step 12

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide29

Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000Getting Started with a BE4000 Customer Site

Page 40: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

ReferencesPrerequisitePurposeTaskStep

See Provision thePhone section of theCisco BusinessEdition 4000Partner Guide fordetailed procedure.

• Have the list ofextensionsconfigured in theBE4000 portal andits associated phonemodel

• Have the requiredphone devicesready on thecustomer site

• DHCP option 150or DHCPOption 66is enabled

Connect phones tothe network andassign extensions thatyou added in theBE4000 Portal whileadding a customersite.

(Task performed onthe customer site)

Connect the phonesto the network andprovision usingExtension Assigner

Step 13

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide30

Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000Getting Started with a BE4000 Customer Site

Page 41: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

C H A P T E R 3BE4000 Architecture and Design Considerations

• BE4000 Customer Network Requirements, on page 31• BE4000 Deployment Overview, on page 33• Wireless Local Area Network Requirements , on page 42• Pre-Staging BE4000, on page 43• Subnets Not Supported by BE4000, on page 44

BE4000 Customer Network RequirementsBE4000 requires certain network specifications for its deployment. Ensure that the customer network meetsall the requirements before adding a site in the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal.

BE4000 Management TunnelCisco Business Edition 4000 requires permanent access to the internet to communicate with the cloud portal,receive NTP time updates, receive software upgrades, and if configured, for carrying SIP traffic.

If the internet connection is lost, the BE4000 still handles the calls that do not involve calls over the internet.

The following DMVPN Ports and Protocols are required to be open outbound on the connection used toconnect to the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management cloud:

• UDP Port 500

• Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol (ISAKMP). Used in IKE

• UDP Port 4500

• NAT Traversal (NAT-T). When the BE4000 is behind NAT, NAT-T encapsulates ESP in UDP port4500 to allow ESP to communicate in and out of the network

• HTTP (port 80) and HTTPS (port 443) access from the BE4000 to the internet

• Outbound access to Domain Naming System (DNS): DNS port 53 must be open

• ICMP (Internet ControlMessage Protocol) access to SEA (208.115.101.160/27) andDFW (4.16.236.64/27)servers

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide31

Page 42: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Each BE4000 appliance needs to be connected behind a NAT device behind a public IP address for managementconnectivity. Multiple BE4000 appliances cannot be configured behind the same public IP address.

Note

DHCP Server• By default the BE4000 uses a DHCP address for initial deployment. A static address may be configuredlocally if a DHCP server is not available. Connection can be via console, or Ethernet to the MGMT port.For information on console and Ethernet based connection, see Local Administration, on page 55.

• When deploying Cisco Unified IP Phones, it is necessary for the phones to automatically discover theBE4000 to download phone configuration files. DHCP Option 66 and/or DHCP Option 150 is requiredto provide the TFTP address of the BE4000 for connecting the IP phones. If neither DHCP option 66nor DHCP Option 150 is available, you must manually configure each IP phone's TFTP configurationwith the IP address of the BE4000.

The following IP Networks are not supported:

• 10.0.1.x/24

• 10.0.2.x/24

• 10.0.3.x/24

• 10.1.1.x/24

• 10.1.2.x/24

• 10.1.3.x/24

• 10.2.x.x/16

• 10.3.x.x/16

Note

BE4000 in Voice VLANsBefore the phone has its IP address, the phone determines which VLAN it should be in by the Cisco DiscoveryProtocol (CDP) negotiation that takes place between the phone and the switch. This negotiation allows thephone to send packets with 802.1Q tags to the switch in a “voice VLAN” so that the voice data and all otherdata coming from the computer behind the phone are separated from each other at Layer 2. Voice VLANsare not required for the phones to operate, but they provide additional separation from other data on thenetwork.

Voice VLANs can be assigned automatically from the switch to the phone, thus allowing for providing Layer2 and Layer 3 separation between voice data and all other data on a network. A voice VLAN also allows fora different IP addressing scheme because the separate VLAN can have a separate IP scope at the DynamicHost Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide32

BE4000 Architecture and Design ConsiderationsDHCP Server

Page 43: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

The BE4000 can be deployed on the voice VLAN or on a different IP subnet. In both the ways, the BE4000needs to have directed routed access to all phones, and be able to access the internet.

The BE4000 proxies the media. Phones only need signaling and media connectivity to the BE4000. They donot need signaling nor media connectivity to other phones.

Note

BE4000 Deployment OverviewBE4000 must be deployed in the customer LAN. Usually, the BE4000 only needs to establish outboundconnections to internet services, so there is no need to deploy in a DMZ (demilitarized zone) or to forwardall traffic to the BE4000. In the case of certain SIP trunk configurations, it may be necessary to forwardinbound VoIP traffic (signaling and media) to the BE4000 LAN address. In these cases, the customer edgedevice needs to be configured accordingly for port forwarding. The BE4000 accepts traffic from trusted Ciscocloud management servers and additional partner or customer defined servers as defined in the deviceconfiguration. It is the customer's responsibility to ensure the blocking of traffic from other sources at theirfirewall to prevent common toll fraud and other attacks.

Port Address Translation (PAT) without port forwarding is not supported in BE4000.Note

When deploying the BE4000 solution, ensure that IP phones are deployed on the same network as the BE4000.This ensures certain features such as IP phone Paging, Intercom, and Music On Hold (MOH) work withoutthe need for additional changes to the network infrastructure. If IP phones are deployed on a different network,ensure that any Layer 3 devices in between the IP phones and the BE4000 support multicast multicast IPaddress 239.1.1.99 and are configured to forward the traffic. See the documentation provided by the networkequipment vendor to determine how to enable multicast routing.

BE4000 Single-Site DeploymentBE4000 supports one appliance per site, with up to 200 device registrations (a phone is 1 registration; an ATAacts as 2 devices and so uses 2 device registrations). It is a standalone appliance with no option for clusteringand cannot join or be used with an existing Cisco Unified Communications Manager or Cisco UnifiedCommunications Manager Express.

When using the Setup Assistant wizard in the BE4000 Partner Portal, Region Settings selection for Countryis used for language selection (phone localization and voicemail). Country is also used for dial plan. Onlyone language is supported per appliance.

A minimum internet download speed of 2 Mbps is required.Note

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide33

BE4000 Architecture and Design ConsiderationsBE4000 Deployment Overview

Page 44: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Figure 2: Single Site Deployment

BE4000 Intersite DialingBE4000 supports a BE4000 site to call other BE4000 sites or to a central call control system without using aPSTN network. Intersite Dialing is useful in a business with multiple locations such as regional branch offices.

A thorough understanding of Intersite Dialing feature, network design, best practices, and careful planningare required before deploying a BE4000 site with Intersite Dialing capabilities.

• Intersite Dialing capability is supported only on the main interface (GE 0/0/0).

• You can configure Intersite Dialing only for the sites that are in the "Online" state. A customer musthave a minimum of 2 sites in the "Online" state for configuring Intersite Dialing.

• While configuring Intersite Dialing, if the IP address of the BE4000 is not in the following IP addressrange, then add them manually on the Private IP Range page before deploying:

• 10.0.0.0 /8

• 172.16.0.0 /12

• 192.168.0.0 /16

• When an end user from one BE4000 site calls an end user in another BE4000 site by dialing the site IDfollowed by the extension, on the caller phone, the called phone number is displayed without the sitecode.

Example

An end user with extension 2001 belonging to site 1 having site ID 21 calls an end user with extension3001 in site 2 having site ID 31 by dialing the site 313001. In this scenario, the phone belonging to theextension 3001 displays the incoming call number as 212001. But, the phone belonging to the end userwith extension 2001, displays the outgoing called number as 3001 instead of 313001.

Note

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide34

BE4000 Architecture and Design ConsiderationsBE4000 Intersite Dialing

Page 45: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

BE4000 Sites in Mesh Topology

Amesh topology allows you to connect up to six BE4000 sites directly for Intersite Dialing. A mesh topologydoes not require a central call control platform. Selecting mesh topology leads to guided configuration whereadministrators can select from a list of best practice options to ensure ease of management and reliabledeployment.

In a mesh topology, only BE4000 sites can be connected. To connect to other call control devices, you mustuse star topology. For more information on star topology, see BE4000 Sites in Star Topology, on page 38.

Note

In a mesh topology, calls are routed directly from one BE4000 to the other over an IP network using SIP.Calls can be made between sites using a shorter number than dialing the whole Direct Inward Dial (DID)extension number. For example, dial 4503 rather than +1 555 123 4503. There are two dial plan optionsavailable to end users.

• Dial using Site ID and Extension Number

• Dial using Extension Number

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide35

BE4000 Architecture and Design ConsiderationsBE4000 Sites in Mesh Topology

Page 46: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Call an Extension in Another BE4000 Site Using Site Identification Number and Extension Number

Each site has 3, 4, or 5-digit extension numbers and 2-digit site identification number (also known as site ID).When calling an extension within the same site, end users dial the extension number. When calling betweensites, the end users dial the site ID of the remote site and then the extension number. Key advantage of usinga site ID is that you can have the extension numbers overlapping between sites and the dial plan requires lessplanning. Using site ID is beneficial while retrofitting Intersite Dialing to an existing deployment where thedial plan cannot natively avoid overlaps between sites.

Call an Extension in Another BE4000 Site Using Extension Number Only

BE4000 does not support calling an extension in another BE4000 site by using extension number only.Note

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide36

BE4000 Architecture and Design ConsiderationsCall an Extension in Another BE4000 Site Using Site Identification Number and Extension Number

Page 47: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Each site can have 3, 4, or 5-digit extension number which has to be unique across all the BE4000 sites in thedeployment. When dialing either within the BE4000 site or across multiple BE4000 sites, an end user simplydials the extension number. There is no need to dial the site identification number.

Key advantage of using a flat dial plan is that extension numbers are kept short (minimum 3-digit dialing)and the organization appears to be one large deployment. A flat dial plan needs up front planning. To ensurethat extensions do not overlap, reserve an extension range for each site.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide37

BE4000 Architecture and Design ConsiderationsCall an Extension in Another BE4000 Site Using Extension Number Only

Page 48: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

BE4000 Sites in Star Topology

A star topology allows you to connect any number of BE4000 sites to a centralized call control system (suchas Cisco Unified SIP Proxy, Cisco Unified CommunicationsManager, third-party SIP provider) for site-to-sitedialing. Selecting star topology leads to an advanced configuration, where administrators enter dial plan rulesto route calls to the centralized call control.

There is no limit to the number of BE4000 sites that can be used in a star topology. A system can have onlyone BE4000 site communicating with an existing non-BE4000 call control system, or thousands of BE4000sites connected to a Cisco Unified SIP Proxy in a retail branch scenario.

In a star topology, calls are routed directly from each BE4000 to the centralized call control over an IP networkusing SIP. Star topology is only recommended for administrators with a strong knowledge of SIP configurationin Intersite Dialing deployment scenarios.

Remote User in a BE4000 NetworkRemote users are supported either via VPN or direct connection, if they have directed routed access to theBE4000.

• The BE4000 does not include a VPN server.

• The BE4000 proxies the media. Phones only need signaling and media connectivity to the BE4000. Theydo not need signaling nor media connectivity to other phones.

Note

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide38

BE4000 Architecture and Design ConsiderationsBE4000 Sites in Star Topology

Page 49: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

PSTN Connectivity in BE4000Using up to two of the network interface modules in the BE4000, you can directly connect to your PSTNprovider using analog or digital trunks.

BE4000 supports the following trunk types:

• FXO/DID

• Basic Rate ISDN

• Primary Rate ISDN (T1 or E1)

• T1 CAS and E1 R2 are not supported.

• Each NIM ISDN card (PRI or BRI) supports only one service provider. If your network has multipleservice providers, you require multiple NIM PRI or BRI cards.

• You cannot configure a combination of BRI (NIM-2BRI-NT/TE, NIM-4BRI-NT/TE) and PRI(NIM-1MFT-T1/E1, NIM-2MFT-T1/E1, NIM-4MFT-T1/E1) cards on the BE4000 appliance.

Note

Figure 3: PSTN Connectivity

BE4000 SIP Trunk Connectivity

SIP trunk supports up to 100 sessions.Note

The BE4000 also allows calling via an IP trunk to a single service providers using single SIP trunk.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide39

BE4000 Architecture and Design ConsiderationsPSTN Connectivity in BE4000

Page 50: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

A variety of options are provided that allow services to be delivered via dedicated service connections, orover the top of a customer's internet access. To simplify configuration, a number of preconfigured templatesfor certain service providers are also offered through the management portal.

SIP Service Provider—Due to diverse SIP implementations by service providers, new service providersmust be brought on board and validated before attempted use. Contact the service provider on boarding teamby sending an email to [email protected] to begin the on boarding process. Depending onthe complexity of the service provider's SIP service specification, we recommend beginning the serviceprovider on boarding process as early as possible.

To expedite the on boarding process, provide the following information about your deployment:

• Partner name

• Deployment address

• Serial number of the BE4000

• SIP service provider name

• Technical information provided by the service provider

The following IP Networks are not supported:

• 10.0.1.x/24

• 10.0.2.x/24

• 10.0.3.x/24

• 10.1.1.x/24

• 10.1.2.x/24

• 10.1.3.x/24

• 10.2.x.x/16

• 10.3.x.x/16

Note

The BE4000 offers two primary options for connecting to a SIP VoIP trunking service:

1. Using the main interface (GE 0/0/0) of the BE4000 for the SIP trunk, media and cloud managementconnection

2. Using the BE4000 secondary interface (GE 0/0/1) connected to a dedicated internet connection for yourVoIP service

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide40

BE4000 Architecture and Design ConsiderationsBE4000 SIP Trunk Connectivity

Page 51: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Using the BE4000 Main Interface for SIP Trunk ConnectivityFigure 4: SIP Trunk Connectivity Using Main Interface

In this scenario, the BE4000 is connected as a privately addressed host in your local area network, so it isassumed that all traffic sent to the internet is subject to Network Address Translation (NAT). As such, thefollowing is required to reliably exchange VoIP traffic:

1. Secure a static public internet address from your ISP. The BE4000 uses this address to ensure that signalingis properly formatted as it is sent.

2. It may also be necessary to forward inbound traffic to the BE4000, especially if your SIP provider doesnot require registration. Depending on the capabilities of your WAN router, this may be accomplished ina number of ways:

a. Add port forwarding rules for SIP signaling and media traffic.

b. Use static NAT rules.

c. Configure the BE4000 IP address as a DMZ host.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide41

BE4000 Architecture and Design ConsiderationsUsing the BE4000 Main Interface for SIP Trunk Connectivity

Page 52: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Using the BE4000 Secondary Interface for SIP Trunk and External MediaFigure 5: SIP Trunk Connectivity Using Secondary Interface

The secondary interface may be configured with an IP address either manually or dynamically through DHCP.If a manual address is configured and traffic is passed through NAT, then an external IP address may beconfigured in the portal to fix up signaling traffic. This option is not currently offered where an address isassigned dynamically. In this case, it is assumed that the assigned address is either publically routable, or ifNAT is used, then the VoIP provider offers transparent hosted NAT traversal.

When using the secondary interface, the BE4000 must be assigned an address in a different subnet to thatused for the primary interface.

To ensure that traffic is correctly routed and accepted, all IP addresses used by your provider must be includedin the portal trusted address list for the trunk.

Wireless Local Area Network RequirementsA BE4000 customer site requires Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) configurations for provisioning thewireless IP phones. We recommend that a Cisco certified partner with advanced wireless LAN specializationperforms a customer site survey. During the survey, the Cisco certified partner should analyze the following:

• RF spectrum to determine which channels are usable in the desired band (5 or 2.4 GHz)

• Heat maps showing the intended coverage plan for the location

• The access point platform type, antenna type, access point configuration (channel and transmit power).We recommend you to select an access point with integrated antennas for non-rugged environments (forexample, office, healthcare, education, hospitality) and an access point platform requiring externalantennas for rugged environments (for example, manufacturing, warehouse, retail)

Signal

The cell edge should be designed to -67 dBm where there is a 20-30% overlap of adjacent access points atthat signal level. This ensures that the wireless IP phones always have adequate signal and can hold a signallong enough in order to roam seamlessly where signal based triggers are utilized verses packet loss triggers.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide42

BE4000 Architecture and Design ConsiderationsUsing the BE4000 Secondary Interface for SIP Trunk and External Media

Page 53: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Also, ensure that the upstream signal from the wireless IP phones meet the access point’s receiver sensitivityfor the transmitted data rate. Ensure that the received signal at the access point is -67 dBm or higher.

We recommend you to design the cell size to ensure that the wireless IP phones can hold a signal for at least5 seconds.

Chanel Utilization

Channel Utilization levels should be kept under 40%.

Noise

Noise levels should not exceed -92 dBm, which allows for a Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) of 25 dB where a-67 dBm signal should be maintained.

Also ensure that the upstream signal from the wireless phone meets the access point’s signal to noise ratiofor the transmitted data rate.

Packet Loss or Delay

As per voice guidelines, packet loss should not exceed 1% packet loss; otherwise voice quality can be degradedsignificantly. Jitter should be kept minimal (< 100 ms).

Retries

802.11 retransmissions should be less than 20%.

Multipath

Multipath should be kept minimal as it can create nulls and reduce signal levels.

Pre-Staging BE4000It is not normally necessary and we do not recommend that you pre-stage the BE4000. If you do want topre-stage the BE4000, you must fully simulate the customer’s network environment including internal andexternal IP addresses because certain system parameters cannot be modified after they have been initiallyconfigured.

The IP address of the BE4000 and certain other parameters cannot be changed after the BE4000 has beeninitially configured. If you need to change any of these values, you must follow the directions to factory resetyour appliance and start a new deployment. If you need to do this, remember that you can save templateconfigurations to avoid typing everything in a second time.

Note

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide43

BE4000 Architecture and Design ConsiderationsPre-Staging BE4000

Page 54: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Subnets Not Supported by BE4000

The following IP Networks are not supported:

• 10.0.1.x/24

• 10.0.2.x/24

• 10.0.3.x/24

• 10.1.1.x/24

• 10.1.2.x/24

• 10.1.3.x/24

• 10.2.x.x/16

• 10.3.x.x/16

Note

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide44

BE4000 Architecture and Design ConsiderationsSubnets Not Supported by BE4000

Page 55: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

C H A P T E R 4Set up a Customer Site

• Request Access to the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal, on page 45• Add Partner Users for Accessing the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal, on page 47• Access Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal, on page 47• Collect BE4000 Customer Network Requirements, on page 49• Add a BE4000 Customer Site in Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal, on page 51• Redeploy the BE4000 Site, on page 52• Replace a Faulty BE4000 Appliance, on page 52

RequestAccesstotheCiscoBusinessEdition4000ManagementPortal

Before you begin

• You must have Cisco ID. If you do not have a Cisco ID, Register Now.

• You must be associated with a Cisco Partner. If your company is new to Cisco, complete PartnerRegistration.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the Partner Self Service (PSS) portal—http://www.cisco.com/go/pss with your Cisco ID.Step 2 Select Manage My Access.Step 3 Click Request Additional Access.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide45

Page 56: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 4 Select BE4000 Portal from the drop-down list.

Step 5 Click Submit.Step 6 Contact one of the Partner Administrators from the list for the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management

Portal access.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide46

Set up a Customer SiteRequest Access to the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal

Page 57: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

What to do next

A Partner Administrator adds you as a user and grants access to the Cisco Business Edition 4000ManagementPortal. For details on how a Partner Administrator can grant access, see Add Partner Users for Accessing theCisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal, on page 47.

Add Partner Users for Accessing the Cisco Business Edition4000 Management Portal

Only a Partner Administrator can perform the following steps and grant access to the Cisco Business Edition4000 Management Portal.

Note

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to Partner Self Service (PSS) portal—www.cisco.com go pss with your Cisco ID.Step 2 Select Manage My Access from the drop-down list.Step 3 Select Company Access tab.Step 4 Search and add the user.Step 5 Click Edit, select BE4000 "User" from the list of services, and click Next.Step 6 Enter description in the comments field, and click Submit.

Access Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management PortalBefore you begin

To access the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal, Cisco partners are required to use two factorauthentication using a standards-based one time password (OTP) generator together with their Cisco.com useraccount. Varieties of standards-based OTP applications are available (some of them are listed here), free ofcharge, for most makes of smart phone.

• For iPhone phones: OTP Auth or Google Authenticator.

• For Android phones: Google Authenticator or FreeOTP Authenticator.

The PingID authentication application is not currently supported.Note

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide47

Set up a Customer SiteAdd Partner Users for Accessing the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal

Page 58: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Procedure

Step 1 Go to the URL:https://be4000.cisco.com.Step 2 Sign in using your Cisco.com credentials.Step 3 Accept the Terms of Service.Step 4 Click Continue.Step 5 Enter the device name. The name entered here is displayed on the OTP application that is configured on your

smart phone. Click Continue.Step 6 Use the OTP application to scan the QR code. Click Continue.Step 7 Enter the security code that is generated by your OTP application. Click Continue.Step 8 Save the recovery code. Click Continue.

If you lose your smart phone, you can sign in using the recovery code.Note

When you log in to the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal for the first time, a video containingthe information about how to configure, deploy, and manage a BE4000 site is displayed. You must watch thisvideo completely to proceed further and view the Cisco Business Edition 4000Management Portal dashboard.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal DashboardThe Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal uses a three-section layout which consists of thefollowing:

• Top-level section with notifications and high-level user details.

• Feature menu section that helps to manage BE4000 sites and edit the column display.

• Content section that displays only after a BE4000 is added to the page.

Once the customer is added on the page, you can view customers and add, update, or delete their configurationdetails.

The features of the dashboard are explained as follows:

DescriptionFeature

Your BE4000 Partner users and list.

Information on how to get started and the documentation available.? Help

You can search for your customers and find key information about each site,users, or groups anytime.

Customer Search

Refreshes all customer data on this page.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide48

Set up a Customer SiteCisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal Dashboard

Page 59: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionFeature

Viewmore details of the site and appliance. For example, IP address, last call,version, the last change made, created by, and so on.

By default, you see details of the following columns:

• Customer Name

• Location

• Status

• License

• Serial Number

• Phones

• Phones

• Last Change

• Actions

Add a new customer. See Add a BE4000 Customer Site in Cisco BusinessEdition 4000 Management Portal, on page 51.

Add Customer

The License column of Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal dashboard displays the Cisco SmartLicense status of your BE4000 site. For more information on Licensing, see Smart License, on page 178.

Collect BE4000 Customer Network RequirementsThe following information is mandatory to create and configure a customer site. Contact your customer andcollect the details.

Customer Contact Details

• Customer Name

• Location where the BE4000 appliance is placed

• Customer administrator’s email address

• Customer administrator’s contact name

LAN Network Details

• BE4000 IP Address

• Voicemail IP address and subnet mask

• Gateway address

• Internet Service Provider Name

• SMTP Service details (Required to enable voicemail to email functionality)

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide49

Set up a Customer SiteCollect BE4000 Customer Network Requirements

Page 60: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Direct Dial Numbers

Direct Dial Numbers are customer’s numbers for SIP, BRI, and PRI connections. Collect the numbers andthe service name for each number.

SIP Trunks

Customer preference for SIP trunk connectivity:

1. Use the main interface (GE 0/0/0) of the BE4000 for the SIP trunk and internet connectivity

2. Use the BE4000 secondary interface (GE 0/0/1) connected to a dedicated internet connection for SIP trunkand use the main interface (GE 0/0/0) of the BE4000 only for internet connectivity

If customer chose option 2, check which one of the following they are using for the SIP trunk:

• Static address

• Dynamic address

If they are using static address, collect IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, service name, and proxyserver and port details, and trusted IP addresses.

If they are using dynamic address, collect the interface type they are using, service name, and proxy serverand port details, and trusted IP addresses.

Line Cards

Check if your customer wants to connect to traditional telephone services and devices. If yes, ensure that thecustomer orders the NIM card based on the required services. Refer to Cisco Business Edition 4000 ReleaseNotes for the list of supported NIM cards.

Collect the information on the type of NIM card its associated details from your customer.

• For FXS Cards, collect Extension name, extension number, class of restriction (COR), u-law/a-law

• For FXO Cards, collect Line name, line number, Inbound only/In and Out, u-law/a-law

• For BRI Cards, collect Service name and Overlap receiving (enabled or disable)

• For PRI Cards, collect Service name, T1/E1, ISDN Switch type

Dial Plan

• Country

• Local Dialing Options

• Telephony port tone

• Time zone

• Language preference

• Number of digits in an extension

• Digits to dial

• An outside line

• An intercom extension

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide50

Set up a Customer SiteCollect BE4000 Customer Network Requirements

Page 61: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• To send voicemail automatically

End User Details

• For user-specific phones—First name, last name, display name, extension number, phone mode, COR,email address if user requires voicemail functionality

• For public phones (used for common services such as a conference room)—Display name, extension,and phone type

Business Hours

Customer’s working days and hours.

Maintenance Schedule

A 2-hour block of time each day when it is safe for the system to install the software updates. The systemmay be offline and unable to make or receive phone calls during the maintenance schedule.

Add a BE4000 Customer Site in Cisco Business Edition 4000Management Portal

Use the Setup Assistant wizard in the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal to create your newcustomer site. You can view and manage multiple customers. Here, each customer is equivalent to a singleBE4000 appliance. Each site has a BE4000 that is configured with features for users connecting through thatsite.

Before you begin

You must have your customer network information ready before you create a site. See Collect BE4000Customer Network Requirements, on page 49.

Procedure

Step 1 Click Add Customer on the upper right corner of the dashboard.Step 2 Click Get Started to start creating a customer site.Step 3 Enter the customer and location details on the Add Customer page. See Add Customer Field Descriptions,

on page 193.You can manually enter the customer details to create a site or select a template. Selecting the template autopopulates the network information and other site details based on the template.

Step 4 Enter the LAN Network Connection, Direct Dial Numbers, SIP Trunks, and Line Card informationcollected from the customer on the Connectivity page. See Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194.

Step 5 Enter the Region Settings, System Settings, and Dial Plans information collected from the customer on theDial Plan page. See Dial Plan Field Descriptions, on page 219.

Step 6 Enter the details of the users, extensions, and other calling features on the Stations page. See Stations FieldDescriptions, on page 221.You can manually enter the details by adding rows or upload your spreadsheet (based on the template)containing the user details.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide51

Set up a Customer SiteAdd a BE4000 Customer Site in Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal

Page 62: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 7 Create Hunt Groups, Auto Attendant, and so on, based on customer requirements on the Call Routing page.See Call Routing Field Descriptions, on page 223.

Step 8 Upload an audio file for Music On Hold, create paging groups, and so on, based on the customer requirementson the Features page. See Features Field Descriptions, on page 233.

Step 9 Click Yes if you want to apply the entered BE4000 configuration changes for your site. Else, click No tocontinue with editing the setup assistant configurations.

Once you are done with the setup assistant, you are ready to deploy the site you created.

If you terminate the Setup Assistant wizard after adding customer details before completing the configurations,the customer site is created and listed in the dashboard. You can edit the configurations later.

Note

Redeploy the BE4000 SiteProcedure

Step 1 Log in to be4000.cisco.com.Step 2 Click Replace/Reset corresponding to the desired site from the Actions menu.Step 3 Click Factory Reset.Step 4 Click Reset in the pop-up window that appears.

Factory reset is performed on the existing hardware to reset the system configuration to the pre-deployedstate. All configuration changes made after the initial setup is deleted, including audio files and system backups.All the phones connected to the BE4000 appliance are disconnected.

Replace a Faulty BE4000 ApplianceBE4000 supports Return Material Authorization (RMA), wherein you can replace a faulty BE4000 appliancewith a new one. The configurations of the faulty appliance can be restored onto the new one.

If the faulty appliance is online, you can take the backup of the configurations before flagging the appliancefor RMA. If the faulty appliance is offline, you cannot take the backup of before flagging for RMA. However,if the appliance had any existing backups, you can select it while deploying the replacement appliance.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide52

Set up a Customer SiteRedeploy the BE4000 Site

Page 63: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Table 6: RMA Task Flow

ReferencesPrerequisitePurposeTaskStep

Flag the FaultyBE4000 Appliancefor RMA, on page53

—Flag the customersite for RMA so thatthe faulty appliancecan be replaced withthe new appliance.

Flag the faultyappliance for RMA

Step 1

Deploy the RMAReplacementBE4000 Appliance,on page 53

• Have the serialnumber of thenew appliance

• If you had linecards on faultyappliance,ensure that thesame (or sametype) line cardsare inserted.

Deploy the newappliance that isreceived for RMAwith the same siteconfigurations as itwas on the faultyappliance.

Deploy the RMAReplacementAppliance

Step 2

Flag the Faulty BE4000 Appliance for RMA

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to be4000.cisco.com.Step 2 Click Replace/Reset corresponding to the desired site from the Actions menu.Step 3 Click Replace Hardware to migrate the existing configuration to new hardware.Step 4 Click Save in the RMA Device pop-up window.

If you close the RMA Device pop-up window after the Backup in Progress displays, the system backup willcontinue uninterrupted. A new system backup can be triggered only once the current backup is complete.

Once the initially triggered system back up is complete and if you had closed theRMA Device pop-up window,a toaster message is displayed at the bottom right corner of the BE4000 site. The message displays the systembackup status as Backup Complete or Backup Failed.

Deploy the RMA Replacement BE4000 Appliance

Before you begin

• Have the serial number of the RMA replacement appliance.

• Power off the faulty BE4000 appliance and remove all cable connections. Ensure that you remember allcable connections as the same needs to be replicated on the RMA replacement BE4000.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide53

Set up a Customer SiteFlag the Faulty BE4000 Appliance for RMA

Page 64: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• If you had line cards on faulty appliance, ensure that the same (or same type) line cards are inserted.

Procedure

Step 1 Power on the RMA replacement BE4000 appliance and connect the required cables.Step 2 Set up the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway using the Local Administration screens. For information

on accessing local administration screens, see Local Administration, on page 55.Step 3 Log in to be4000.cisco.com/deploy or use a QR scanner application on your smart phone to scan the QR code

on the underside of the product.Step 4 Enter the serial number of the new appliance, if prompted.Step 5 Select the customer and site from the Customer and Site drop-down lists.Step 6 Select the backup from the Restore from backup drop-down list.Step 7 Verify Network Interface Module (NIM) cards (if necessary) are inserted in appropriate slots, cables are

connected and BE4000 is powered ON.Step 8 Click Deploy Configuration.

• You can reenter the serial number if there is a deployment failure due to an incorrect serial number. Thefailed site is listed along with the other sites in theReady to Deploy state. Enter the correct serial numberand select the failed site to continue the deployment process.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide54

Set up a Customer SiteDeploy the RMA Replacement BE4000 Appliance

Page 65: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

C H A P T E R 5Deploy a Customer Site

• Local Administration, on page 55• Run Port Check Tool, on page 58• Deploy a Customer Site, on page 58• Add Cisco Wireless IP Phone 8821 to the Wireless LAN, on page 60• Provision the Phone , on page 61

Local AdministrationYou can connect to the BE4000 appliance using a Console or Ethernet connection for monitoring the DMVPNtunnel and troubleshooting the connectivity issues. After you connect the BE4000 appliance through Consoleor Ethernet connection, the local administration screen is displayed with a list of menu options. You canchoose an option based on your requirement and get the related information.

Local administration screen can be used only for monitoring and troubleshooting. You cannot configure aBE4000 site using the command line interface (CLI) unlike other Cisco IOS-based routers.

You must be present physically at the BE4000 site to access local administration screen.Note

Console Based Local Administration

Procedure

Step 1 Connect through RJ45 or USB console cable.Step 2 Log in with the username “status”. Password is not required.Step 3 Type the appropriate option and press Enter.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide55

Page 66: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Ethernet based Connectivity for BE4000 Local Administration

Procedure

Step 1 Connect your computer back to back to MGMT port (use a normal Cat5e or Cat6 cable).Step 2 Use SSH client to connect to the BE4000 using either the MGMT IP Address (169.254.100.1) or Host Name

(status@be4000).Step 3 Log in with username status. No password is required.Step 4 Type h to see the available options.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide56

Deploy a Customer SiteEthernet based Connectivity for BE4000 Local Administration

Page 67: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 5 Type the appropriate option and press Enter.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide57

Deploy a Customer SiteEthernet based Connectivity for BE4000 Local Administration

Page 68: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Run Port Check ToolRun Port Check tool to confirm if the UDP ports 500 and 4500 are accessible to the BE4000 portal.

Before you begin

• Port Check tool must be run on Chrome, Firefox, or Opera browsers only

• Your computer must be on the same network as your BE4000 appliance

Procedure

Step 1 Enter the URL https://portcheck.be4000.cisco.com.Step 2 Ensure that UDP ports 500 and 4500 are available.

Deploy a Customer SiteDeploying a Customer site involves downloading the software files from the Cisco Business Edition 4000Management Portal through the internet. So, we recommend you to have a minimum of 2 Mbps internetdownload speed. If you do not have the minimum required internet download speed, you can download thelatest software files from BE4000 Software Download page onto a USB before deployment. Having thesoftware files on the USB expedites the deployment process.

While deploying the BE4000 site, the following checks are made in sequential order:

1. Availability of the USB. If USB is not detected, the software files are downloaded from the Cisco BusinessEdition 4000 Management Portal.

2. If USB is detected, check for the latest software files. If one or more software files on the USB are out ofdate, the software files are downloaded from the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal.

3. If USB is detected and all the files are the latest, the software files are copied locally from USB.

Deploy a Customer Site—Software Updates Through Internet

Before you begin

Ensure that you have:

• BE4000 site is added in the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal

• Internet download speed is a minimum of 2 Mbps

• Network Interface Module (NIM) cards, if necessary, are inserted in appropriate slots and connected

• BE4000 appliance is connected to the network. See, Local Administration

• BE4000 appliance is powered ON

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide58

Deploy a Customer SiteRun Port Check Tool

Page 69: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• A minimum of 2-GB free space on the flash

Procedure

Step 1 Locate the QR code on the underside of the product.Step 2 Use a QR scanner application to scan the QR code and launch the BE4000 portal. If you don’t have a QR

scanner, browse to the BE4000 deploy portal by entering the URL - http://be4000.cisco.com/deploy.Step 3 Enter the serial number if prompted, and select your site configuration.

Ensure that you adhere to the following guidelines while entering the serial number of the BE4000 appliance:

First three characters are letters only, the next four characters are numbers only, and the last four charactersare numbers and letters excluding letters O and I.

Step 4 Verify Network Interface Module (NIM) cards, if necessary, are inserted in appropriate slots, cables areconnected and BE4000 appliance is powered ON.

Step 5 Click Deploy Configuration. After a successful deployment, the site shows “Online” in the Cisco BusinessEdition 4000 Management Portal.

Step 6 (Optional) We recommend that you install the BE4000 appliance in a 19-inch rack. You can also wall mountor place the BE4000 appliance on any secure flat surface, if preferred. If you are installing in a rack, use thebracket mounting point (both sides) to attach the mounting brackets with the screws provided. Use suitablefastenings to secure the product in place.

Deploy a Customer Site—Software Updates Through USB

Before you begin

Ensure that you have:

• A USB 16-GB or less and be formatted for FAT32

• Download permission for BE4000 Software Download page

• BE4000 site is added in the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal

• Network Interface Module (NIM) cards, if necessary, are inserted in appropriate slots and connected

• BE4000 appliance is connected to the network. See, Local Administration

• BE4000 appliance is powered ON

• A minimum of 2-GB free space on the flash

Procedure

Step 1 Download the software from BE4000 Software Download page.Step 2 Copy the downloaded software image to the root directory of the USB.Step 3 Insert the USB in to the USB slot available on the BE4000 appliance.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide59

Deploy a Customer SiteDeploy a Customer Site—Software Updates Through USB

Page 70: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 4 Locate the QR code on the underside of the product.Step 5 Use a QR scanner application to scan the QR code and launch the BE4000 deploy portal. If you don’t have

a QR scanner, browse to the BE4000 deploy portal by entering the URL - http://be4000.cisco.com/deploy.Step 6 Enter the serial number if prompted, and select your site configuration.

Ensure that you adhere to the following guidelines while entering the serial number of the BE4000 appliance:

First three characters are letters only, the next four characters are numbers only, and the last four charactersare numbers and letters excluding letters O and I.

Step 7 Verify Network Interface Module (NIM) cards, if necessary, are inserted in appropriate slots, cables areconnected and BE4000 appliance is powered ON.

Step 8 Click Deploy Configuration. After a successful deployment, the site shows “Online” in the Cisco BusinessEdition 4000 Management Portal.

Step 9 (Optional) We recommend that you install the BE4000 appliance in a 19-inch rack. You can also wall mountor place the appliance on any secure flat surface, if preferred. If you are installing in a rack, use the bracketmounting point (both sides) to attach the mounting brackets with the screws provided. Use suitable fasteningsto secure the product in place.

Add Cisco Wireless IP Phone 8821 to the Wireless LANBefore provisioning the CiscoWireless IP Phone 8821, you must add the phone to the wireless LAN. Performthe following steps on the Cisco Wireless IP Phone 8821 phone:

Before you begin

• To ensure reliability and performance, your wireless LAN should meet the requirements outlined in theCisco Wireless IP Phone 8821 and 8821-EX Wireless LAN Deployment Guide.

• Ensure that you have the following details ready:

• SSID—Name of the wireless LAN

• Security type (for example, WEP, EAP)

• PIN or passkey for selected security type

• If you are not using DHCP, ensure that you have the following details ready:

• IP address

• Subnet mask

• Default router

• DNS server 1

• TFTP server 1

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide60

Deploy a Customer SiteAdd Cisco Wireless IP Phone 8821 to the Wireless LAN

Page 71: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Procedure

Step 1 Select Settings > Wi-Fi.Step 2 Select a Profile.Step 3 (Optional) Set a profile name.

a) Select Profile Name.b) Enter the name of the Profile.c) Press More and select Save.

Step 4 Select Network configuration > IPv4 Setup.Step 5 Select DHCP and press On.Step 6 (Optional) If you are not using DHCP, select DHCP and press Off. Enter the IP address and subnet mask of

the phone, default router, DNS Server 1, and TFTP server 1 address in the respective fields.Step 7 Select WLAN configuration.Step 8 Select SSID. Use the keypad to enter the SSID of the wireless access point. Press More and select Save.

Ensure that the SSID matches the name of the wireless LAN.Note

Step 9 Select Security mode based on the security type configured for your wireless LAN.Step 10 Select 802.11 mode and select the required mode. The mode determines the frequency. If you set the mode

to Auto, the phone can use either the 5 or 2.4-GHz frequency, with 5 GHz as the preferred frequency.Step 11 Select On call power save and press Select to change the setting. Only for troubleshooting purposes, set this

field to disabled.Step 12 Press More and select Save.

Provision the PhoneExtension Assigner feature allows you to assign an extension to a new or replacement IP phone. Perform thefollowing steps to assign an extension to a phone.

Before you begin

• Customer site successfully deployed and available Online

• You have Network IP address, TFTP options containing IP address of BE4000, and Gateway address toconnect to the BE4000 server

We recommend you to configure DHCP Option 150 to simplify the provisioningof phones. Configuring DHCP Option 66 is also supported. You can manuallyconfigure the TFTP address but it may take more time.

Note

• If you are provisioning Cisco Wireless IP Phone 8821, ensure that you have configured the phone withthe wireless LAN. For more information, see Add Cisco Wireless IP Phone 8821 to the Wireless LAN,on page 60.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide61

Deploy a Customer SiteProvision the Phone

Page 72: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the phone to the network.

The phone gets assigned with a temporary extension.

If you are manually configuring the TFTP address and you are prompted for a password whileaccessing the administrator settings on the phone, enter adg234.

Note

Step 2 Dial the Extension Assigner directory number, 70000. When prompted for password, enter 1234.Step 3 Enter the pound (#) key.Step 4 Enter the permanent extension, followed by the pound (#) key. Enter the extension configured on the portal

for this user or phone.Step 5 Enter 1, followed by the pound (#) key to confirm the extension.Step 6 End the call.

The phone reboots and the assigned extension is shown on the phone display.

If you are prompted for a password while accessing the administrator settings on the phone afterconfiguring the permanent extension, enter ptwmjg.

Note

Troubleshooting Phone ProvisioningOnce a phone is known to the system (auto-registered or fully configured), it may become unregistered forseveral reasons (some of them are listed below). Check for the following:

• Verify whether the phone is connected to power and is operational.

• Check whether the phone has an IP address and the TFTP address. If the MAC address is correct, phonesmust have lost its connection to BE4000. Unplug and plug the phones to the BE4000 network again.

• Check reachability between the phone and BE4000. The TFTP address must be the address of BE4000.If there is no reachability, then connect the phones to a different port and verify the reachability again.

• Even after the correct IP address and TFTP is configured, and the phone is still unregistered, checkwhether BE4000 is reachable from the phone. If the phone is faulty, we have to replace the phone.

• Verify whether the customer site is in the Online state.

• Try resetting the phone to factory default. On the phone display, chooseApplications > Admin Settings> Reset Settings > All.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide62

Deploy a Customer SiteTroubleshooting Phone Provisioning

Page 73: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

C H A P T E R 6Manage Your Site

• View Status of the BE4000 Appliance, on page 64• Troubleshoot the Status of BE4000, on page 64• Share the Configuration Details of a BE4000 Site, on page 66• Modify the Customer Site After Deployment, on page 66• Configure Intersite Dialing—Mesh Topology, on page 67• Configure Intersite Dialing—Star Topology, on page 68• Configuration Templates , on page 70• Line Cards , on page 71• SIP Trunk , on page 85• Supported Codecs, on page 87• Troubleshooting BE4000 Issues , on page 88• Overview of Auto Attendant , on page 90• Change Business Hours , on page 98• Phone Branding , on page 99• Overview of Users , on page 99• Extensions , on page 108• Phones, on page 117• Conference, on page 125• Privacy and Privacy Button, on page 127• Barge, on page 128• Enterprise Line Key, on page 128• Private IP Address Ranges, on page 130• Personal Voicemail Box, on page 131• Reach System Operator from a Personal Voicemail Box, on page 134• Configure Voicemail Description Style, on page 135• Enable Voicemail Box Space Notification Emails, on page 136• Group Voicemail Box, on page 136• Hunt Groups, on page 139• Night Service, on page 145• Pickup Group, on page 147• Call Park , on page 149• Paging, on page 150• Intercom , on page 152

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide63

Page 74: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• Call Detail Records , on page 153• Emergency Alerting , on page 159• Task Log, on page 159• Cisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapters, on page 161• Direct Inward Dial Numbers, on page 163• Inbound Call Blocking, on page 165• Modify Music on Hold, on page 166• Specify Maintenance Schedule, on page 166• Configure Voicemail to Email , on page 167• Modify the Digit to Send Calls to Voicemail Automatically, on page 177• Modify the Digit to Dial an Outside Line, on page 177• Modify Time Zone, on page 178• Smart License, on page 178• Configure Back Up Schedule for a Site, on page 179• Restore the Backed-Up Site Configuration, on page 180• Delete a Customer Site, on page 181• Manually Reset to Factory Default, on page 182• Reload the BE4000 Appliance, on page 185• Reset OTP, on page 186• Update Primary Contact Details, on page 186• Add Secondary OTP Devices, on page 187• Log In to the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal Using Recovery Code, on page 188• Sign In to BE4000 Partner Portal Using a Secondary OTP Device, on page 188• Manage Customer Administrators, on page 189

View Status of the BE4000 ApplianceYou can view the status of all the BE4000 appliances at various customer locations. Service status is refreshedin real time. Click the icon to manually refresh the status.

For more information on the various status states available for BE4000, their definitions, and ways totroubleshoot them, see Troubleshoot the Status of BE4000, on page 64.

Troubleshoot the Status of BE4000Troubleshooting InformationDescriptionAppliance Status

—Service is available.Online

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide64

Manage Your SiteView Status of the BE4000 Appliance

Page 75: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Troubleshooting InformationDescriptionAppliance Status

Check if:

• Appliance is disconnected.

• Appliance is powered off.

• Customer has changed the firewall settings and theseports are blocked: UDP 500, UDP 4500, or ESP 50.

• Customer’s internet connection is down.

Appliance's managementconnection to the cloud isdown.

Offline

Customer might be:

• Moving offices.

• Switching out internet providers over the weekend.

Appliance must be reloaded when it is connected back.

Appliance has beeninactive for more than aperiod.

Inactive

Errors can be for the following reasons:

• More than 15% of the phones are unregistered.

• Any issue with the traditional or VoIP trunks.

• There is impact to the phone services.

There is an error relatedto the service.

Needs Attention

Ensure that you enter all details in the BE4000 navigationwizard to make the appliance ready to be deployed.

Site is being set up by theuser.

Configuration inProcess

—Your configuration iscomplete and ready to beused for the BE4000deployment.

Ready to Deploy

—Appliance is alreadyregistered with thisconfiguration and iscurrently beingconfigured.

Deploying

You must view the navigation on the appliance for moreinformation. Deployment can fail for the following reasons:

• Most likely the ports are blocked.

• Wrong LAN settings.

• Connectivity issues.

Appliance is notdeployed.

DeploymentFailed

Check if the voicemail appliance is faulty. Contact Cisco TACfor assistance.

Voicemail functionalitydoes not work.

VoicemailConfigurationFailed

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide65

Manage Your SiteTroubleshoot the Status of BE4000

Page 76: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Troubleshooting InformationDescriptionAppliance Status

Go to the Deployment status page and click the trace icon toget the deployment failure log details.

Redeploy the site again.

Contact Cisco TAC for assistance.

Your appliance inventoryfailed.

Inventory Failed

Share the Configuration Details of a BE4000 SiteYou can share the configuration details of a BE4000 site with others.

Before you begin

Ensure that the BE4000 site is in the "Online" state.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click ... under Actions column corresponding to the desired site from the dashboard.Step 3 Click Configuration Summary.Step 4 Click Export. A PDF version of the configuration summary is downloaded.

Modify the Customer Site After DeploymentYou can change the settings of your BE4000 appliance after deployment.

Procedure

Step 1 Select a deployed customer site and click the dotted lines next in the Actions column.Step 2 Click Manage Sites to display the configuration summary and editing options.

You can edit the following and then save the changes:

• Auto Attendant—Modify auto attendant settings.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide66

Manage Your SiteShare the Configuration Details of a BE4000 Site

Page 77: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• Business Hours—Modify open and closed hours.

• Extensions—Modify or delete extension numbers.

• Direct Inward Dial Numbers—Add, edit, or delete the Direct Inward Dial (DID) numbers.

• Group Voicemail Box—Create group voicemail box for various departments.

• Hunt Groups—Modify hunt groups.

• Line Cards (NIM)—Change line card settings.

• Music on Hold

• Night Service—Enable or disable night service.

• Personal Voicemail Box—Create personal voicemail box for users.

• Phones—Add or delete phones.

• SIP Trunk

• Troubleshooting

• User Management

Step 3 Save the changes.

Configure Intersite Dialing—Mesh TopologyBefore you begin

• Ensure that you have read the architecture and design considerations that are required for configuringIntersite Dialing.

• A minimum of two BE4000 sites in the "Online" state.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Hover the mouse over Manage Customer under Actions column for the row containing desired customer

name and click Intersite Dialing.Step 3 Click Mesh Topology.Step 4 Move the slider to enable Mesh topology.Step 5 Check the Enable check box corresponding to the desired site and enter a two-digit identification number for

the site in the Site ID field.

Calls between the sites are routed based on the identification number that is entered here.

Step 6 Enter the maximum number of concurrent outbound intersite calls that can be made from the site in the MaxCalls field.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide67

Manage Your SiteConfigure Intersite Dialing—Mesh Topology

Page 78: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 7 Click Save.

Intersite Dialing - Field Descriptions for Mesh TopologyDescriptionField

Enables the BE4000 Site for Intersite Dialing.

"Enable" check box is active only for the BE4000 sites that are in the "Online"state.

Enable

This unique ID is added to the calling party number for outbound calls so thatrecipients can use 'Redial' to call back to that caller. Site ID should be a two digitvalue (Range: 10 to 99).

Site ID

Name of the BE4000 Site. The details are displayed by default and cannot bechanged.

Site Name

Status of the BE4000 site.Site Status

Limits the maximum number of concurrent outbound inter-site calls for a site.Set this based on available bandwidth, service provider policies, and site codec.Max Calls should be a two digit value (Range: 10 to 99).

Max Calls

Configure Intersite Dialing—Star TopologyBefore you begin

• Ensure that you have read the architecture and design considerations that are required for configuringIntersite Dialing.

• A minimum of two BE4000 sites in the "Online" state.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Hover the mouse over Manage Customer under Actions column for the row containing desired customer

name and click Inter Site Dialing.Step 3 Click Star Topology.Step 4 Click Yes, Let's Begin in the First Time Setup pop-up window to display configuration options.Step 5 Choose the template that best matches your controller hardware from the Provider Template drop-down list

on Service Settings page and click Next.Step 6 Enter the required information in the Proxy Server page. For detailed information on fields, refer Intersite

Dialing - Field Descriptions for Star Topology, on page 69. Click Next.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide68

Manage Your SiteIntersite Dialing - Field Descriptions for Mesh Topology

Page 79: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 7 Click Add Row and enter a trusted IP address in the Security page to authenticate incoming calls for tollfraud prevention.

Step 8 Verify the configured central call control configurations. If you choose to modify the configurations, clickReplace Configuration. This allows you to configure star topology from the beginning.

Step 9 Check the Enable check box corresponding to the desired site and enter a two-digit identification number forthe site in the Site ID field.

Calls between the sites are routed based on the identification number that is entered here.

Step 10 Enter the maximum number of concurrent outbound intersite calls that can be made from the site in the MaxCalls field.

Step 11 Click Save.

Intersite Dialing - Field Descriptions for Star TopologyDescriptionField

Choose a preconfigured provider template based on your SIP service provider.If you do not have a preconfigured provide template, choose ISD Custom.

Provider Template

Enter an IP address and Port, Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) and Port,or SRV record for your service proxy.

Proxy Address

Enter a port number for your service proxy.Proxy Port

Choose the protocol used for transport layer by your service provider.Transport Layer

Choose one of the ITU-T T.38 standard Fax Transmission Protocols to be usedin your configuration. Available options are:

• T.38

• T.38 fall back to G.711u

• T.38 fall back to G.711a

• Pass Through G711u

• Pass Through G711a

Fax TransmissionProtocol

Enter a trusted IP address to authenticate incoming SIP trunk calls for toll fraudprevention.

Trusted IP Address

Click Add Row and enter the trusted IP addresses.Add Row

This unique ID is added to the calling party number for outbound calls so thatrecipients can use 'Redial' to call back to that caller. Site ID should be a two digitvalue (Range: 10 to 99).

Site ID

Limits the maximum number of concurrent outbound inter-site calls for a site.Set this based on available bandwidth, service provider policies, and site codec.Max Calls should be a two digit value (Range: 10 to 99).

Max Calls

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide69

Manage Your SiteIntersite Dialing - Field Descriptions for Star Topology

Page 80: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Enables each site to participate in the central topology configuration.Enable

Validates and confirms the connectivity between enabled sites and Central CallController.

Connectivity Report

Configuration TemplatesYou can save the information that you entered in the Setup Assistant wizard as a configuration template andreuse it while creating other BE4000 sites for the same customer with similar configurations. This avoidsentering the configuration details in the Setup Assistant wizard all over again.

You can create configuration templates at both Partner level and Customer level. The Personally IdentifiableInformation (PII) is not saved as part of the configuration template. The template that is saved at Partner levelhas limited data compared to that at a customer level.

A customer level configuration template saves all the information that is entered in the Setup Assistant wizardexcept for the "External Public IP address".

A Partner level configuration template does not save the following information that is entered in the SetupAssistant wizard:

• SMTP Details

• Station Details

• Auto Attendant Audio files (When a saved template is loaded, Auto Attendant is loaded with the defaultprompts)

• Music On Hold Audio files

• Direct Inward Dial Numbers

• Member list in the Hunt Group

• Auto Attendant Drop Through Destination

• Inbound Call Mapping Details

• Outbound Call Mapping Details

• System Operator Details

• Paging Groups

Create a Configuration Template from an Existing BE4000 SiteYou can create a configuration template from an existing site that is deployed and is in the "Online" state.

Procedure

Step 1 Click Create Template from the Actions menu corresponding to the desired site.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide70

Manage Your SiteConfiguration Templates

Page 81: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

You are directed to the "Connectivity" page of the Setup Assistant wizard.Step 2 Edit the details on the pages if necessary.Step 3 Click Save as Template.Step 4 Choose Cisco Partner or customer name from Template Level drop-down list.Step 5 Choose "New" or an existing template from the Apply to Template drop-down list.Step 6 Enter a name for the template in the Template Name field.Step 7 Enter a description in the Description field.Step 8 Click Save.

Line CardsBE4000 allows you to connect to traditional telephony services and devices by adding Network InterfaceModules (NIM). You can add a maximum of two NIM cards (also known as Line cards). For the list ofsupported NIM cards, refer Supported Line Cards.

On the portal, you can add a new NIM card or edit an existing NIM card. Currently, removal and replacementof NIM cards are not supported on the BE4000 portal.

Add a Line Card

Before you begin

• A line card must be installed into the BE4000 appliance

• Have the DID numbers for the line cards ready

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Line Cards (NIM).Step 4 Click Add NIM Card.Step 5 Add the DID numbers on the Direct-Inward-Dial page.

Do not add FXO line numbers. FXO line numbers can be added as port configurations on theupcoming Line Card page.

Note

Step 6 Enter the configuration details based on the type of card inserted. For field descriptions, refer Line Card -Field Descriptions, on page 72.

If you already have a line card installed into your BE4000 appliance, then it automatically getslisted. However, you cannot edit the configurations of an installed line card while adding a new linecard. Refer to Edit a Line Card , on page 81 for details on editing a line card configuration.

Note

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide71

Manage Your SiteLine Cards

Page 82: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 7 Enter the details in the Inbound Call Mapping and Outbound Caller ID pages based on your requirements.

You can map the incoming calls on the DID number to a Meet Me conference number, apart fromAuto Attendants, Hunt Group, and Extensions.

Note

Step 8 Click Yes to save the changes.

The phone systems go offline and you cannot make or receive calls until the updates are successfullycompleted.

Note

Step 9 Click Done.

Ensure that emergency services, DID numbers, and card features are tested and verified.Note

Line Card - Field Descriptions

NIM-2FXS or NIM-4FXS

DescriptionField

If you are using NIM-2FXS or NIM-4FXS, input the following details:

Choose one of the following:

• Disabled—The line is inactive.

• Analog Phone—The line is connected to an analog phone.

• Paging—The line is connected to an external paging system.

• Automatic Ringdown—The line is connected to a phone that has a dedicatedconnection with another phone. When the phone connected to this line goesoff hook, the destination phone rings. There is no need to dial any number.

Type

Enter the label to identify each line.Label

Enter the extension number.Extension

This field is visible only when you choose "Automatic Ringdown"from the Type drop-down list.

Note

Enter the extension of the destination phone that rings when the phone goes offhook.

Destination

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide72

Manage Your SiteLine Card - Field Descriptions

Page 83: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Choose one of the following Class of Restriction (COR):

• internal

• local

• local-plus

• national

• national-plus

• international

Class of Restriction decides the type of calls that can be placed from the FXSphone line.

Note • You must select the Class of Restriction (COR) for every linewhile adding FXS cards in the Setup Assistant.

• This field is available only when you chooseAnalog Phone fromthe "Type" drop-down list.

Restrictions

Choose the type of algorithm used for modifying an input signal for digitization:

• u-law

• a-law

Law

The amount of amplification or deamplification of sound in terms of decibels.Range is from -6 to 14 db. Default value for FXO line is 0 db and for FXS lineis 6 db.

This field is available only while editing the line cards containing FXSand FXO lines. This field does not appear while adding the line cardduring initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant wizard) or postsite deployment (under Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) > Add NIMCard).

Note

Input Gain (db)

The value that is configured for minimizing the signal loss. Range is from -6 to14 db. Default value for FXO and FXS line is 0 db.

This field is available only while editing the line cards containing FXSand FXO lines. This field does not appear while adding the line cardduring initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant wizard) or postsite deployment (under Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) > Add NIMCard).

Note

Output Attenuation (db)

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide73

Manage Your SiteLine Card - Field Descriptions

Page 84: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

NIM-2FXO or NIM-4FXO

DescriptionField

If you are using NIM-2FXO or NIM-4FXO, input the following details:

Choose one of the following:

• Disabled—The line is inactive.

• Trunk—The line is connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network.

• Paging—The line is connected to an external paging system.

Type

Enter the label name.Label

This field appears only when "Trunk" is chosen from the "Type"drop-down list.

Note

Enter a name for the trunk line.

Name

Enter the number for analog phone line.Extension

This field appears only when "Trunk" is chosen from the "Type"drop-down list.

Note

Enter the number for the trunk line.

Number

Choose one of the following:

• Ground

• Loop Start

Start Type

Mark the line as incoming only or bidirectional. The system builds the trunkgroups based on what you select.

• In + Out—Allows the phone line to receive and make calls.

• Inbound Only—Allows the phone line to receive the calls.

Direction

Choose the type of algorithm used for modifying an input signal for digitization:

• u-law

• a-law

Law

The amount of amplification or deamplification of sound in terms of decibels.Range is from -6 to 14 db. Default value for FXO line is 0 db and for FXS lineis 6 db.

This field is available only while editing the line cards containing FXSand FXO lines. This field does not appear while adding the line cardduring initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant wizard) or postsite deployment (under Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) > Add NIMCard).

Note

Input Gain (db)

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide74

Manage Your SiteLine Card - Field Descriptions

Page 85: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

The value that is configured for minimizing the signal loss. Range is from -6 to14 db. Default value for FXO and FXS line is 0 db.

This field is available only while editing the line cards containing FXSand FXO lines. This field does not appear while adding the line cardduring initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant wizard) or postsite deployment (under Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) > Add NIMCard).

Note

Output Attenuation (db)

Displays the advanced fields.Show Advanced

Configuration Voice Port Commands

The following fields are displayed only when the Show Advanced check box is checked.Note

Enables or disables cable polling on an analog Foreign Exchange Office (FXO)port.

Cable Detect

Configuring "Bearer Capability" drop-down list does not have anyaffect on the FXO port.

Note

Specifies the information transfer capability of the bearer capability informationelement (IE) in the outgoing ISDNSETUPmessage for Session Initiation Protocol(SIP) early-media calls. You can choose one of the following:

• Speech—Specifies speech as the information transfer capability.

• 3100hz—Specifies 3.1 kHz audio as the information transfer capability.

Bearer Capability

Configures the type of supervisory disconnect signaling available on the FXOport. When the supervisory disconnect tone is detected on the FXO port, thesystem interprets this as a disconnect indication from the switch and clears thecall. Choose one of the following:

• dualtone—Disconnects calls when the router detects call-progress tonesfrom a PBX or the PSTN.

• anytone—Disconnects the call if the PBX or PSTN does not provide asupervisory tone. Examples of tones that trigger a disconnect include busytone, fast busy tone, and dial tone.

• signal—Enables a disconnect indication by detecting the power denial whichuses the LCFO signal on the remote end.

Supervisory Disconnect

Time-outs

Specifies when to disconnect the call. You can choose one of the following:

• timer—Specifies the duration to wait while the phone is ringing beforedisconnecting the call. Range is from 0 to 120 seconds.

• infinity—Disables disconnect supervision. The voice port does not disconnectwhen a disconnect tone is detected.

Call Disconnect

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide75

Manage Your SiteLine Card - Field Descriptions

Page 86: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Specifies the number of seconds for which the systemwaits for the caller to inputthe first digit of the dialed digits. Range is from 0 to 120 seconds.

Initial Timeout

Configuring Power Denial drop-down list does not have affect on theFXO port.

Note

Sets the duration of the power denial that the voice gateway applies to the FXSport when a call disconnects. Range is from 0 to 2500 seconds.

Power Denial

Limits the time a voice port can be held in a call failure state. After the timeout,the release sequence is enabled. You can choose one of the following:

• timer—Range is from 1 to 3600 seconds.

• infinity—The voice port is never released as long as the call-failure stateremains.

Wait Release

NIM-2FXS/4FXO

DescriptionField

If you are using NIM-2FXS/4FXO, input the following details:

FXS

Choose one of the following:

• Disabled—The line is inactive.

• Analog Phone—The line is connected to an analog phone.

• Paging—The line is connected to an external paging system.

• Automatic Ringdown—The line is connected to a phone that has a dedicatedconnection with another phone. When the phone connected to this line goesoff hook, the destination phone rings. There is no need to dial any number.

Type

Enter the label to identify each line.Label

Enter the extension number.Extension

This field is visible only when you choose "Automatic Ringdown"from the Type drop-down list.

Note

Enter the extension of the destination phone that rings when the phone goes offhook.

Destination

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide76

Manage Your SiteLine Card - Field Descriptions

Page 87: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Choose one of the following Class of Restriction (COR):

• internal

• local

• local-plus

• national

• national-plus

• international

Class of Restriction decides the type of calls that can be placed from the FXSphone line.

Note • You must select the Class of Restriction (COR) for every linewhile adding FXS cards in the Setup Assistant.

• This field is available when you choose Analog Phone from the"Type" drop-down list.

Restrictions

Choose the type of algorithm used for modifying an input signal for digitization:

• u-law

• a-law

Law

The amount of amplification or deamplification of sound in terms of decibels.Range is from -6 to 14 db. Default value for FXO line is 0 db and for FXS lineis 6 db.

This field is available only while editing the line cards containing FXSand FXO lines. This field does not appear while adding the line cardduring initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant wizard) or postsite deployment (under Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) > Add NIMCard).

Note

Input Gain (db)

The value that is configured for minimizing the signal loss. Range is from -6 to14 db. Default value for FXO and FXS line is 0 db.

This field is available only while editing the line cards containing FXSand FXO lines. This field does not appear while adding the line cardduring initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant wizard) or postsite deployment (under Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) > Add NIMCard).

Note

Output Attenuation (db)

FXO

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide77

Manage Your SiteLine Card - Field Descriptions

Page 88: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Choose one of the following:

• Disabled—The line is inactive.

• Trunk—The line is connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network.

• Paging—The line is connected to an external paging system.

Type

Enter the label name.Label

This field appears only when "Trunk" is chosen from the "Type"drop-down list.

Note

Enter a name for the trunk line.

Name

Enter the number for analog phone line.Extension

This field appears only when "Trunk" is chosen from the "Type"drop-down list.

Note

Enter the number for the trunk line.

Number

Choose one of the following:

• Ground

• Loop Start

Start Type

Mark the line as incoming only or bidirectional. The system builds the trunkgroups based on what you select.

• In + Out—Allows the phone line to receive and make calls.

• Inbound Only—Allows the phone line to receive the calls.

Direction

Choose the type of algorithm used for modifying an input signal for digitization:

• u-law

• a-law

Law

The amount of amplification or deamplification of sound in terms of decibels.Range is from -6 to 14 db. Default value for FXO line is 0 db and for FXS lineis 6 db.

This field is available only while editing the line cards containing FXSand FXO lines. This field does not appear while adding the line cardduring initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant wizard) or postsite deployment (under Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) > Add NIMCard).

Note

Input Gain (db)

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide78

Manage Your SiteLine Card - Field Descriptions

Page 89: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

The value that is configured for minimizing the signal loss. Range is from -6 to14 db. Default value for FXO and FXS line is 0 db.

This field is available only while editing the line cards containing FXSand FXO lines. This field does not appear while adding the line cardduring initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant wizard) or postsite deployment (under Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) > Add NIMCard).

Note

Output Attenuation (db)

NIM-2BRI-NT/TE or NIM-4BRI-NT/TE

DescriptionField

If you are using NIM-2BRI-NT/TE or NIM-4BRI-NT/TE, input the following details:

Choose one of the following:

• Disabled—The line is inactive.

• Trunk—The line is connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network.

Type

Choose a service name from the drop-down list. The drop-down list contains thelist of service providers that you added in the DID page. Service name enteredhere is shared across all the lines or ports for the selected NIM type.

You cannot choose the same service provider for SIP and Line Cards.Note

Service Name

If your service provider requires that your line use a static Terminal EndpointIdentifier, enter the value between 0 and 63. If the field is left blank, the lineattempt to negotiate a TEI.

Static TEI

Choose whether you want your call setup to work based on overlap receiving.You can enable or disable this option. If your service provider does not use“enbloc” signaling, this option allows BE4000 to wait for additional digits to bereceived before the call is routed.

Overlap Receiving

Check the "Send Redirecting IE Number" check box to include the RedirectingNumber Information Element in the outbound Setupmessages. Leave uncheckedif you are not sure about your service provider supporting this feature.

Send Redirecting IENumber

Enter the ISDN SPID. Some service providers use service profile identifiers(SPIDs) to define the services subscribed to by the ISDN device that is accessingthe ISDN service provider. A SPID is usually a seven-digit phone number withsome optional numbers.

ISDN SPID

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide79

Manage Your SiteLine Card - Field Descriptions

Page 90: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Choose amethod for TEI negotiation based on your service provider requirements.Setting a static TEI overrides TEI negotiation.

The default behavior is TEI to be negotiated on power-up. The following optionsare provided to preserve or remove a negotiated TEI when the interface is reset:

• Power Up and Remove

• Power Up and Preserve

• First Call and Remove

• First Call and Preserve

TEI Negotiation Method

NIM-1MFT-T1/E1, NIM-2MFT-T1/E1, or NIM-4MFT-T1/E1

DescriptionField

If you choose NIM-1MFT-T1/E1, NIM-2MFT-T1/E1, or NIM-4MFT-T1/E1, enter the following details:

Choose the card type based on your customer network requirement. E1 PRI ischosen by default. The available options are:

• T1 PR1

• E1 PRI

Card Type

Choose one of the following:

• Disabled—The line is inactive.

• Trunk—The line is connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network.

Type

Choose a service name from the drop-down list. The drop-down list contains thelist of service providers that you added in the DID page. Service name enteredhere is shared across all the lines or ports for the selected NIM type.

You cannot choose the same service provider for SIP and Line Cards.Note

Service Name

Choose one of the following ISDN Service Provider PRI Switch Types:

• primary-4ess

• primary-5ess

• dms100

• primary-net5

• primary-ni

“primary-4ess” is chosen by default.

ISDN Switch Type

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide80

Manage Your SiteLine Card - Field Descriptions

Page 91: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Defines the controller setup for configuring channelized T1 or E1 controllers.Choose either Full PRI or partial PRI.

Controller Setup

Choose a line code. By default, the line code for E1 PRI is high-density bipolar3 (hdb3).

Line Code

Choose the framing from the drop-down list. This option defines the framingcharacteristics.

Framing

Check the "Send Redirecting IE Number" check box to include the RedirectingNumber Information Element in the outbound Setupmessages. Leave uncheckedif you are not sure about your service provider supporting this feature.

Send Redirecting IENumber

Edit a Line Card

Before you begin

• A line card must be installed into the BE4000 appliance.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Line Cards (NIM).Step 4 Click Edit Configuration.Step 5 Modify the required details for the installed line cards. For field descriptions, refer Line Card - Field

Descriptions, on page 72.Step 6 Click Yes to save the changes.

The phone systems go offline and you cannot make or receive calls until the updates are successfullycompleted.

Note

Step 7 Click Done.

Ensure that emergency services, DID numbers, and card features are tested and verified.Note

Private Line Automatic RingdownBE4000 supports configuring Private Line Automatic Ringdown (PLAR) on FXS ports available on the NIMcards. PLAR is also known as “Automatic Ringdown”.

PLAR creates a dedicated connection with between two phones. When a phone configured with PLAR goesoff-hook, the destination phone rings automatically without dialing any number.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide81

Manage Your SiteEdit a Line Card

Page 92: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

You can configure PLAR while adding or modifying Line cards containing FXS ports.

PLAR is not supported on Analog Telephone Adapter (ATA) FXS ports.Note

Configure Private Line Automatic Ringdown

Before you begin

Line Card (NIM) with FXS port is inserted into the BE4000 appliance.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) corresponding to the desired site.Step 3 ClickAdd NIM Card if you are adding line card for the first time orEdit Configuration if you are modifying

the existing line card configuration.

If you are adding line card for the first time, add DID numbers (except for FXO numbers).

Step 4 Click the Line corresponding to which you wish to configure Private Line Automatic Ringdown (PLAR).Step 5 Choose Automatic Ringdown from the Type drop-down list.Step 6 Enter a text in the Label field which makes you easy to identify the line.Step 7 Enter an extension that is associated with the PLAR line in the Extension field.Step 8 Enter an extension in the Destination field. The extension that is configured here rings automatically when

the phone configured with PLAR goes off-hook.Step 9 Choose an option from the Law drop-down list based on your network preferences.Step 10 Save the configurations.

Troubleshoot the Status of Line CardsClick Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) to check the status of the line cards configured on your BE4000appliance. The Installed Hardware section provides the detailed status of the line cards including the timestampwhen the line card status was fetched. You can click Refresh to fetch the latest status of the line cards.

It takes around 30 seconds to fetch the status of the line cards.Note

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide82

Manage Your SiteConfigure Private Line Automatic Ringdown

Page 93: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Figure 6: Line Card Status Summary

Table 7: Line Card Status Analysis

DescriptionColumn

Two line cards slots available in the BE4000 appliance. NIM 1 and NIM 2 arealways displayed irrespective of the card inserted on to the BE4000 appliance.

Slot

Type of card inserted on to the BE4000 appliance. If you have not inserted a linecard, “No card found” is displayed.

Card Type

Based on your line card configuration, one of the following is displayed:Status

Line card is in service. DSP resources and all the portsare in service.

Good

The line card is inserted on the BE4000 appliance,but not configured on the BE4000 portal. Click AddNIM Card under “Manage Card Settings” section toconfigure the line card.

Not Configured

There is an error related to the line card service. EitherDSP resources or one of the ports is not in service.Click Needs Attention to see the detailed status.

Needs Attention

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide83

Manage Your SiteTroubleshoot the Status of Line Cards

Page 94: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionColumn

DSP (PVDM4) resources available for the line card. DSP resources are requiredfor configuring the ports.

DSP

Either DSP resources are not available or DSPresources are not in service. Click Needs Attentionto see the detailed status.

(Needs Attention)

DSP is available and in service.

The number of ports available for the line card type is listed with its status. Thestatus of the ports can be one of the following:

Port

Either port is not configured or not in service. ClickNeeds Attention to see the detailed status.

(Needs Attention)

Port is in service.

Click Needs Attention for detailed status.

Figure 7: Line Card Detailed Status

Click Show corresponding to the L1 Status for error report.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide84

Manage Your SiteTroubleshoot the Status of Line Cards

Page 95: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Figure 8: L1 Status

Click Cycle Port to disconnect and reconnect the port. When you recycle the port, all active calls on the portare disconnected.

Figure 9: Cycle Port

SIP TrunkSIP Trunk can be configured on the BE4000 during the initial deployment. However, in case, if the SIP Trunkis not added during the initial deployment, it can be added post site deployment.

If SIP trunk is added during initial deployment, you can remove it from BE4000 post site deployment.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide85

Manage Your SiteSIP Trunk

Page 96: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• You cannot modify the SIP Trunk configurations. You can only add or remove the SIP Trunks.

• You can add only one SIP Trunk per site.

Note

Add SIP Trunk

Before you begin

Ensure that you have:

• The DID numbers provided by your SIP service provider.

• The inbound call mapping and outbound caller ID display preference ready.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site > SIP Trunk for the desired site from the Actions menu.Step 3 Click Add SIP Trunk.Step 4 Add DID Numbers on the Direct Dial Numbers page.Step 5 Add SIP Trunk details on the SIP Trunk page.

Choose your provider from the "Provider Template" or use "Custom". To have a new provider addedas template, or to request assistance, contact the dedicated SIP Support Team. Do not open a TACcase as they will not be able to assist you.

Note

Step 6 Choose a default target for each service provider from the Default Target drop-down list on the InboundCall Mapping page. Based on your preference, choose a target type (auto attendant, extension, or hunt group)for each extension from Target Type drop-down and choose a corresponding target number from TargetNumber drop-down list.

Step 7 Choose a default outbound DID for each service provider from the Default Outbound DID drop-down liston the Outbound Caller ID page. Based on your preference, choose a DID number as Caller ID for eachextension from the Caller ID drop-down list.

Step 8 Click Yes to save the changes.

Remove SIP TrunkRemoving the SIP Trunks from the BE4000 removes all the configurations that are related to SIP trunk.

Before you begin

Ensure that you have a SIP Trunk already configured.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide86

Manage Your SiteAdd SIP Trunk

Page 97: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site > SIP Trunk for the desired site from the Actions menu.Step 3 Click Delete SIP from the Actions menu.

You get an option to save or purge the DID numbers that are associated with the SIP Trunk. If you choose tosave, the DID numbers are stored in the system and provides an option to load the same while adding a newSIP Trunk in future. If you choose to purge, all the DID numbers get deleted from the system.

Step 4 Click Save or Purge, based on your preference for saving DID numbers.

Manage Trusted IP Address List

Before you begin

Have the list of IP addresses to be added, modified, or deleted.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from the "Actions" column for the desired site.Step 3 Click SIP Trunk.Step 4 Click Trusted List at the top of the page. "Modify Trusted List" page appears.Step 5 Click Add Row and enter the IP address in the newly added row.Step 6 (Optional) You can modify or delete the IP addresses, if necessary.Step 7 Click Save.

Supported CodecsBE4000 supports the following codecs:

• g711ulaw

• g711alaw

• g729r8

• ilbc

• g722-64

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide87

Manage Your SiteManage Trusted IP Address List

Page 98: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Priority Order of Codecsg711ulaw and g711alaw are enabled by default for sites using custom SIP service provider template duringthe initial deployment. Out of the two, g711ulaw is given the highest priority. You can choose to enable othercodecs and also change the priority based on your SIP service provider needs. If you are using the predefinedSIP service provider template, then based on the SIP service provider preference the codecs are enabled bydefault.

The order of codecs in the list affects the order of the codecs presented in the Session Description Protocol(SDP) for outbound calls on the SIP trunk. The choice of codec used is defined by the recipient of the codeclist, and may or may not be affected by the order of the codecs. The order of the codecs is mainly for use whena service provider mandates that codecs are listed in a specific order.

A Cisco Partner can enable the codecs and set the priority during initial deployment in the Setup Assistantwizard. Post site deployment, both Cisco Partner and Customer Administrator can modify the list of codecsthat are enabled and also change priority order.

Modify Codec List and Set Priority

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site > SIP Trunk for the desired site from the Actions menu.Step 3 Click Modify Codec from Actions menu corresponding to the SIP trunk row.Step 4 Check the check boxes corresponding to the codecs that you want to enable.Step 5 Drag and drop the codec names row to set the priority order.Step 6 Click the arrow at the bottom-right corner of the screen and click Yes to apply the changes made.

Troubleshooting BE4000 IssuesBE4000 allows you to run show and debug commands from the BE4000 portal. You can download a localcopy of show command output and get the debug command output sent to your preferred email address.

The following are the categories available for running show commands:

• SIP

• DID Translation

• Phone

• TDM

• Hunt Group

• Dial Plan

The following are the categories available for running debug commands:

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide88

Manage Your SitePriority Order of Codecs

Page 99: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• SIP Signaling

• Shared Line

• Voip

• Vpm Signal

• Voice Register Errors

• Call Routing

• Presence

• Isdn Q31

• Voice Register Events

• Voice Register Session Servers

Run Show Commands

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from the "Actions" menu for the desired site.Step 3 Click Troubleshooting.Step 4 Click Run corresponding to the “Show Command” section.Step 5 Choose a method based on your preference from the Choose Method drop-down list. The following are the

methods available:

• SIP

• DID Translation

• Phone

• TDM

• Hunt Group

• Dial Plan

Step 6 (Optional) Hover the mouse pointer over the text View the chosen show commands. Based on the chosenmethod, you can see the list of show commands that are selected for execution.

Step 7 Click Run. The output is generated and downloaded on to your system. Close the pop-up window after theoutput is successfully downloaded.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide89

Manage Your SiteRun Show Commands

Page 100: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Run Debug Commands

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from the "Actions" menu for the desired site.Step 3 Click Troubleshooting.Step 4 Click Run corresponding to the “Run Debug" Command” section.Step 5 Choose a method based on your preference from the Choose Method drop-down list. The following are the

methods available:

• SIP Signaling

• Shared Line

• Voip

• Vpm Signal

• Voice Register Errors

• Call Routing

• Presence

• Isdn Q31

• Voice Register Events

• Voice Register Session Servers

Step 6 Enter the duration for executing debug commands in the Enter Duration 5-30 Minutes field. You can rundebug commands for a minimum of 5 minutes and a maximum of 30 minutes.

Step 7 Enter the email address for receiving the debug command output in the Enter Email to receive report(separated by commas) field.

Step 8 Click Run. An email containing the debug command output is sent to the entered email address.

Overview of Auto AttendantAuto Attendant service (also referred to as a virtual receptionist), is a phone system that enables your callersto be automatically transferred to an extension, eliminating the need for a receptionist and avoiding extendedwaiting period. BE4000 provides you an automated phone answering facility to communicate effectively withcustomers and improve your business operations. An auto attendant answers all incoming calls with an audiogreeting and options menu (different for open and closed hours). A maximum of five submenus with amaximum depth of 3 levels can be configured. The caller can select a menu option to reach to the desiredextension.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide90

Manage Your SiteRun Debug Commands

Page 101: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

You can define the number of times the menu options is played to the caller before the call reaches the dropthrough destination. You can also define where the call lands if no action is performed by the caller even afterthe defined number menu repetitions.

Cisco partner, customer administrator, and any end user with PromptAdministrators privileges on their personalvoicemail box can update auto attendant greetings and prompts.

Add Auto AttendantYou can add or update Auto Attendant service post site deployment.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from "Actions" menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Auto Attendant.Step 4 Enter the information in the fields.Step 5 Click the arrows at the bottom of the screen to move to next screen or to go back to the previous screen.Step 6 Click Yes.

Auto Attendant - Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter the number that callers dial to reach auto attendant. A minimumof four digits is required. Range is from 1000 to 9999.

Pilot Number

Number of times the audio file is played to the caller before the callreaches the drop through destination. Value range is from 1 to 9. Defaultvalue is 4.

How many times do you wantmessage to be played

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide91

Manage Your SiteAdd Auto Attendant

Page 102: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Defines where the call lands if no action is performed by the caller evenafter playing the menu for the defined number of repeats. You canconfigure one of the following as the drop through destination:

• Route to Extension—All extensions are listed in the drop-down.

• Route to Voicemail Box—All extensions that have "Voicemail"enabled are listed in the drop-down.

• Route to Hunt Group—All Hunt Groups are listed in thedrop-down.

• Route to Group Voicemail Box—All group voicemail boxes arelisted in the drop-down.

During the initial site deployment (in the SetupAssistant), the drop-down shows an option, only if youcreate a group voicemail box on theHunt Groups page,by choosing "Route to Group Voicemail Box" from theWhen No Member is Available drop-down list.

Note

• Disconnect Call—The call gets disconnected.

Drop Through Destination

Add an audio prompt for welcome Message. The BE4000 provides adefault audio file. This audio message is played first when a call isanswered by the auto attendant. You can also upload a new .wav file.To select a new file, click Upload.

BE4000 supports only .wav audio file with G.711 u-law,8kHz, 8 bit, Mono format. The file cannot be larger than 1MB (about 2 minutes). The filename cannot have space andspecial characters.

The system default message is a silent recording. You needto replace the message with a custom recording.

Note

Audio Prompt (WelcomeMessage)

Add an audio prompt for open message. The BE4000 provides a defaultaudio file. This audio message is played when a call is answered duringthe open business hours. You can also upload a new .wav file. To selecta new file, click Upload.

BE4000 supports only .wav audio file with G.711 u-law,8kHz, 8 bit, Mono format. The file cannot be larger than 1MB (about 2 minutes). The filename cannot have space andspecial characters.

The system default message is a silent recording. You needto replace the message with a custom recording.

Note

Audio Prompt (Open Message)

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide92

Manage Your SiteAuto Attendant - Field Descriptions

Page 103: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Add customizedmenu options. You can add 0-9menu options in additionto a * menu. Each menu option can be labeled in a meaningful way tohelp identify locations or users in your system using any one of thefollowing: Dial by Name, Pilot Number, Dial by Number, Call HuntGroup, Return to Main Menu, or Submenu.

Add Menu Option

Displays the default audio file that is played for all calls received duringclosed hours. You can play the existing file or upload a new .wav file.To select a new audio file, click Upload.

BE4000 supports only .wav audio file with G.711 u-law,8kHz, 8 bit, Mono format. The file cannot be larger than 1MB (about 2 minutes). The filename cannot have space andspecial characters.

The system default message is a silent recording. You needto replace the message with a custom recording.

Note

Audio Prompt (Closed Message)

Add customizedmenu options. You can add 0-9menu options in additionto a * menu. Each menu option can be labeled in a meaningful way tohelp identify locations or users in your system using any one of thefollowing: Dial by Name, Pilot Number, Dial by Number, Call HuntGroup, Return to Main Menu, or Submenu.

Add Menu Option

Enable Users to Update Auto Attendant Greeting and PromptsAn end user with "PromptAdministrators" privileges can update auto attendant greeting and prompts from aphone. To assign "PromptAdministrators" privilege for an end user, perform the following:

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Personal Voicemail Box.Step 4 Click Modify from the Actions menu for the desired user.Step 5 Navigate to Groups page and click Groups.Step 6 Check PrompAdministrators. (Hover the mouse on PromptAdm to view the complete text)Step 7 Click OK.

Auto Attendant PromptsBE4000 provides default audio files for Welcome, Open, and Closed prompts. You can also upload customaudio files to the prompts according to your business need.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide93

Manage Your SiteEnable Users to Update Auto Attendant Greeting and Prompts

Page 104: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• The BE4000 portal displays AA_aPrompt1.wav as the default for welcome prompt and contains themessage "Prompt number 1, Auto Attendant, Prompt Number 1"

• The BE4000 portal displays AA_bPrompt2.wav as the default for open prompt and contains the message"Prompt number 2, Auto Attendant, Prompt Number 2"

• The BE4000 portal displays AA_cPrompt3.wav as the default prompt for closed prompt and contains themessage "Prompt number 3, Auto Attendant, Prompt Number 3"

Modify Auto Attendant Prompts from a Phone

Before you begin

If you are an end user, you should have "PromptAdministrators" privileges. Contact your customer administratorto know if you have "PromptAdministrators" privileges.

Procedure

Step 1 Dial 70397.Step 2 Enter your extension followed by the pound (#) key.Step 3 Enter the PIN followed by the pound (#) key.

Enter the PIN that you use to access your voicemail. If you have forgotten the PIN, log in to the BE4000Selfcare Portal and reset the PIN. Refer End User Guides for detailed procedure to reset the PIN.

You hear the prompts as follows:

Welcome to administration via telephone system.

• To administer the Automated Attendant Alternate Greeting, press 1

• To administer custom prompts, press 2

Step 4 Press 2.

You hear the following:

• Press 1 record a new prompt

• Press 2 to edit previously recorded prompt

• Press * to go back previous menu

Step 5 Press 2.

You hear the total number of prompts available for your network and the message recorded for each prompt.You hear the following options for each prompt:

• Press 2 to rerecord the prompt

• Press 3 to delete it

• Press # To go to next prompt

• Press * to skip playback of prompts

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide94

Manage Your SiteModify Auto Attendant Prompts from a Phone

Page 105: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 6 Press 2 when you hear the prompt you want to rerecord.

You hear the following:

Record the new prompt at the tone. Press # to finish recording.

Step 7 Record the new prompt after the beep.Step 8 Press # key to complete the recording.

You hear the newly recorded prompt followed by the following options:

• Press 1 to save the prompt

• Press 2 to delete the prompt

Step 9 Press 1 to save the newly recorded prompt.

The consecutive prompt is played.

Step 10 Repeat steps 6 to 9 for the prompts that you want to edit.Step 11 End the call.

Alternate GreetingAlternate greeting is a voice message recorded from a phone by the customer administrator or a phone userwith the "PromptAdministrators" privileges. Alternate greeting is used if there is a disaster or a sudden businessneed to replace the existing prompts. Alternate greeting is played first followed by the welcome prompt andthe open or closed prompts. Alternate greeting is played irrespective of open and closed business hours.

Alternate Greeting does not show up in the BE4000 portal and all administration must be done via the PromptAdministrator Phone Menu 70397.

Note

Add Auto Attendant Alternate Greeting from a Phone

Before you begin

If you are an end user, you should have "PromptAdministrators" privileges. Contact your customer administratorto know if you have "PromptAdministrators" privileges.

Procedure

Step 1 Dial 70397.Step 2 Enter your extension followed by the pound (#) key.Step 3 Enter the PIN followed by the pound (#) key.

Enter the PIN that you use to access your voicemail. If you have forgotten the PIN, log in to the BE4000Selfcare Portal and reset the PIN. Refer End User Guides for detailed procedure to reset the PIN.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide95

Manage Your SiteAlternate Greeting

Page 106: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

You hear the prompts as follows:

Welcome to administration via telephone system.

• To administer the Automated Attendant Alternate Greeting, press 1

• To administer custom prompts, press 2

Step 4 Press 1.

You hear the following prompts:

• Press 1 to record a new prompt

Step 5 Press 1.

You hear the following:

Record the new prompt at the tone. Press # to finish recording.

Step 6 Record a new prompt after the beep.Step 7 Press the # key to complete the recording.

You hear the newly recorded prompt followed by the following options:

• Press 2 to save the prompt

• Press 3 to delete the prompt

Step 8 Press 2 to save the prompt.

Modify Auto Attendant Alternate Greeting from a Phone

Before you begin

• If you are an end user, you should have "PromptAdministrators" privileges. Contact your customeradministrator to know if you have "PromptAdministrators" privileges

• Alternate Greeting must be active

Procedure

Step 1 Dial 70397.Step 2 Enter your extension followed by the pound (#) key.Step 3 Enter the PIN followed by the pound (#) key.

Enter the PIN that you use to access your voicemail. If you have forgotten the PIN, log in to the BE4000Selfcare Portal and reset the PIN. Refer End User Guides for detailed procedure to reset the PIN.

You hear the prompts as follows:

Welcome to administration via telephone system.

• To administer the Automated Attendant Alternate Greeting, press 1

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide96

Manage Your SiteModify Auto Attendant Alternate Greeting from a Phone

Page 107: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• To administer custom prompts, press 2

Step 4 Press 1.

You hear the following prompts:

Your alternate greeting is currently active.

• Press 1 to hear the alternate greeting

• Press 2 to rerecord the alternate greeting

• Press 3 to deactivate this alternate greeting. Deactivating the alternate greeting will delete it from thesystem

Step 5 Press 2.

You hear the following:

Record the new prompt at the tone. Press # to finish recording.

Step 6 Record a new prompt after the beep.Step 7 Press the # key to complete the recording.

You hear the newly recorded prompt followed by the following options:

• Press 1 to save and activate this alternate greeting

• Press 2 to hear the alternate greeting

• Press 3 to rerecord the alternate greeting

Step 8 Press 1 to save the modified alternate greeting.

Delete Auto Attendant Alternate Greeting from a Phone

Before you begin

• If you are an end user, you should have "PromptAdministrators" privileges. Contact your customeradministrator to know if you have "PromptAdministrators" privileges

• Alternate Greeting must be active

Procedure

Step 1 Dial 70397.Step 2 Enter your extension followed by the pound (#) key.Step 3 Enter the PIN followed by the pound (#) key.

Enter the PIN that you use to access your voicemail. If you have forgotten the PIN, log in to the BE4000Selfcare Portal and reset the PIN. Refer End User Guides for detailed procedure to reset the PIN.

You hear the prompts as follows:

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide97

Manage Your SiteDelete Auto Attendant Alternate Greeting from a Phone

Page 108: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Welcome to administration via telephone system.

• To administer the Automated Attendant Alternate Greeting, press 1

• To administer custom prompts, press 2

Step 4 Press 2.

You hear the following prompts:

Your alternate greeting is currently active.

• Press 1 to hear the alternate greeting

• Press 2 to rerecord the alternate greeting

• Press 3 to deactivate this alternate greeting. Deactivating the alternate greeting will delete it from thesystem

Step 5 Press 3.

You hear the following:

This operate is not reversable. Are you sure you wish to continue?

• Press 1 for yes

• Press 2 for no

Step 6 Press the 1 to deactivate the alternate greeting.

You hear the following:

The alternate greeting has been deleted.

Change Business HoursACisco partner configures business hours for a site during the initial site deployment in the "Setup Assistant".After the site is successfully deployed, a Cisco partner or a customer administrator can change the businesshours.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Managed Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Business Hours.Step 4 Click one of the following options:

• 24/7 (No Closed Hours)—Business is functional on 24 hours on all days.

• Dual Hours (Open and Closed)—Set open and closed hours for each day based on the organizationrequirements.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide98

Manage Your SiteChange Business Hours

Page 109: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• Auto Attendant menu is played based on the Open and Closed hours

• You must enter time in 24-hour format only (17:00 for example). Time must be either full (:00)or half hours (:30).

Note

Step 5 (Optional) Click Add New Holiday to add the holidays for the organization.

• You can add holidays only for the current year and a year ahead.

• Date should not be less than the present date.

Note

Step 6 Click the arrow at the bottom-right corner of the screen and click Yes to apply the changes made.

Phone BrandingBE4000 allows a Cisco partner or customer administrator to apply customer branding to phones with customizedbackgrounds and ringtones.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Managed Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Phone Branding.Step 4 In the Customize Phones page, click Upload image file in the Phone Background section. Click Save.Step 5 Click Add Background and Upload image file to upload the next background image. Click Save.Step 6 In the Customize Phones page, click Upload ringtone file in the Phone Ringtones section. Click Save.Step 7 Click Add Ringtone and Upload ringtone file to upload the next ringtone. Click Save.Step 8 Click Save.

The background or ringtone file upload details appear on the Progress page.

Step 9 Click Close.

Overview of UsersCisco partner adds users to a BE4000 site during initial site deployment. A Cisco partner and customeradministrator can add and manage users post site deployment. You can view all the existing users' informationunder Manage Site > User Management.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide99

Manage Your SitePhone Branding

Page 110: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Add a User

Before you begin

Ensure that you have:

• First name, last name, display name, extension, and email address of the user

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from "Actions" menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click User Management. The User Management page is displayed.Step 4 Click Add User.Step 5 Enter the information in the fields. For field descriptions, see User Management - Field Descriptions, on page

100.Step 6 Click the arrows at the bottom of the screen to move to next screen or to go back to the previous screen.Step 7 Click Yes.

What to do next

Provision the Phone for the user.

User Management - Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Extension number that is associated with the end user.

Note • Enter a minimum of 3 digits for an extension. Maximumnumber of digits in an extension can go up to 5.

• You cannot create an extension with leading zero.

• The first digit of the extension cannot be the same as the digitused for dialing an outside line, sending a call to voicemailautomatically, and dialing an intercom extension.

Extension

Display name for the end user. The name entered here is displayed on thecalled phone device when a call is received from this extension. You canenter a maximum of 30 characters.

Display Name

First name of the end user.First Name

Last Name of the end user.Last Name

Email address of the end user. Cisco Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portalregistration link is sent to this email address.

Email Address

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide100

Manage Your SiteAdd a User

Page 111: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Voicemail to email feature is enabled for this extension. Any voicemailcoming to this extension is sent as an email attachment to the registered emailaddress.

Enable Voicemail

Enables the end user to receive voicemail as an email attachment.

Enable VM to Email check box is visible only when the EnableVoicemail check box is checked.

Note

Enable VM to Email

This check box is not visible while modifying a user.Note

Message waiting indicator (MWI) is a lamp that is lit on end user's phone toindicate a waiting voicemail message. Enables MWI functionality for an enduser.

Enable MWI check box is available only when the EnableVoicemail check box is checked.

Note

Enable MWI

Allows the extension to become dynamic member of a Hunt Group.Hunt Group Login

Table 8: Call Forward

DescriptionField

You cannot forward calls to your own extension. Enter an extension other than your own extensionin the following fields.

Note

All the incoming calls are forwarded to another number (such as extension,auto attendant).

The following options are available in the drop-down list:

• No Action

• Outside Number—Enter the number in the text field.

• Extension—Choose the extension from the drop-down list for availableextensions.

• Voicemail

• Auto Attendant—Choose the auto attendant option from the drop-downlist.

All

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide101

Manage Your SiteUser Management - Field Descriptions

Page 112: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

The incoming calls are forwarded to another extension, voicemail box, or anoutside number, only when the extension is busy.

The following options are available in the drop-down list:

• No Action

• Outside Number—Enter the number in the text field.

• Extension—Choose the extension from the drop-down list for availableextensions.

• Voicemail

• Auto Attendant—Choose the auto attendant option from the drop-downlist.

Busy

When the extension is unregistered to BE4000, the calls are forward to anotherextension, voicemail box, or an outside number. An extension can be inunregistered state when the phone device is unplugged or the network betweenthe BE4000 and the extension is not functional.

The following options are available in the drop-down list:

• No Action

• Outside Number—Enter the number in the text field.

• Extension—Choose the extension from the drop-down list for availableextensions.

• Voicemail

• Auto Attendant—Choose the auto attendant option from the drop-downlist.

Unregistered

The incoming calls are forwarded to to another number (such as extension,auto attendant).

The following options are available in the drop-down list:

• No Action

• Outside Number—Enter the number in the text field.

• Extension—Choose the extension from the drop-down list for availableextensions.

• Voicemail

• Auto Attendant—Choose the auto attendant option from the drop-downlist.

If Single Number Reach (SNR) is enabled, the number that isconfigured for "Call Forward No-Answer" on the "Single NumberReach (SNR)" page takes precedence.

Note

No-Answer

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide102

Manage Your SiteUser Management - Field Descriptions

Page 113: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Time in seconds up to which a call rings on the extension when no oneanswers. After this time out period, the call gets forwarded to configuredextension, voicemail box, or an outside number.

No-Answer Timeout (3-60000secs)

Table 9: Single Number Reach (SNR)

DescriptionField

Single Number Reach (SNR) provides end users the choice of answering an incoming call on their deskphone using a mobile phone (cellular network) or a Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) phone.On enabling SNR, an incoming call rings both on the desk phone and the mobile phone (or PSTN phone).End users can answer the call either on their desk phone or from the mobile phone (or PSTN phone) basedon their convenience. An active call can be swapped between the desk phone and the mobile phone (PSTNphone) without disconnecting the call.

The number for Single Number Reach (SNR) functionality.

When entering the SNR number, you must start with the prefix todial an outside line, followed by Country Code, NationalDestination Code (Area Code), and Subscriber Number. Forexample, if 9 is the digit to dial an outside line, 1 is the countrycode, 555 is the area code, and 9999999 is the subscriber number,you must enter 915559999999.

Note

SNR Number

An incoming call is forwarded to the SNR number when the call is notanswered on the desk phone.

Call Forward No-Answer

Calling party number displayed on the configured mobile phone is replacedwith the SNR extension number.

Calling Number Local

Number of seconds up to which a phone rings before transferring the call toconfigured SNR number. Range = 0 to 10 seconds. Default = 1.

SNR Delay (0-10 secs)

Number of seconds up to which phone rings after the configured SNR delay.When the timeout value is reached, incoming call display is stopped on thedesk phone and the call gets forwarded to the configured SNR number. Range= 5 to 60 seconds. Default = 10.

SNR Timeout (5-60 secs)

An incoming call stops ringing on the desk phone after the call is answeredfrom a mobile phone and conversely.

Ring Stop

Number of seconds up to which Single Number Reach (SNR) calls areprevented from being diverted to the voicemail box of a mobile phone. Range= 1 to 5 seconds.

Answer Too Soon (1-5 secs)

Table 10: Additional Settings

DescriptionField

Extension is not associated with an external proxy server.Not Register Number

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide103

Manage Your SiteUser Management - Field Descriptions

Page 114: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Extension automatically answers any inbound call.Auto Answer

Answer an incoming call on the extensions belonging to any pick-up group.Press GPickup followed by * on the phone to answer the pickup group call.

Pickup Call

Associate the extension with a pick-up group. 1 is the default pickup groupcreated by the BE4000.

Pickup Group

Allows extension to make calls that are blocked in the dial plan.Allow calls to blockednumbers

The incoming calls that ring during the night service period on the extensionsends an alert indication to all extensions that are marked to receive nightservice bell notification. The alert notification is in the form of a splash ring(not associated with any of the individual lines on the phone) and a visibledisplay of the extension. The phone users retrieve the call by pressing thePickup softkey.

The following options are available in the drop-down list:

• No Action

• Outside Number—Enter the number in the text field.

• Extension—Choose the extension from the drop-down list for availableextensions.

• Voicemail

• Auto Attendant—Choose the auto attendant option from the drop-downlist.

Night Service Bell

The incoming calls are forwarded to another extension, voicemail box, or anoutside number during night service hours.

Only when the Night Service Bell check box is checked, theForwarding Number text field appears.

Note

Forwarding Number

One extension can be shared across multiple phone devices.

If you assign an extension on more than one phone device usingtheButtons page underManage Site > Phones > Modify Phone,the Shared Line check box under Manage Site > Extensions >Modify Extensions > Additional Settings gets checkedautomatically and cannot be unchecked.

Note

Shared Line

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide104

Manage Your SiteUser Management - Field Descriptions

Page 115: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

This field is visible only when you check the Shared Line checkbox.

Note

Set the maximum number of calls that can be answered for the sharedextension.

Example: Consider that extension 1001 is shared on 3 phones and themaximum number of calls configured for the shared line is 2. At any time,there cannot be more than 2 active calls going on for 1001 on all the 3 phones.

Max Calls (2-16)

Table 11: Add Phone

DescriptionField

Every extension must be associated with a phone type for it to be available for provisioningthrough the Extension Assigner. Hence, we recommend you to add a phone while adding theextension. You can also add phone, under Manage Site > Phones.

Note

List of supported phone models. By default, Cisco IP Phone 7841 is chosen.Phone Type

• Internal—Privileges to call numbers that are internal to the organization.

• International—Privileges to call all numbers including internationalnumbers.

• Local—Privileges to call numbers within the same area code.

• Local-Plus—Privileges to call numbers within the same area code withplus dialing.

• National—Privileges to call numbers within the same nation code.

• National-Plus—Privileges to call numbers within the same nation codewith plus dialing.

COR

Modify Email Address of a UserYou can change only the email address of the user and retain all the other configurations related to the extensionand phone as is.

Before you begin

Ensure that you have the new email address of the user ready

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide105

Manage Your SiteModify Email Address of a User

Page 116: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 3 Click User Management. The User Management page is displayed.Step 4 Click Modify Email from the Actions menu for the desired user.Step 5 Change the email address as required.Step 6 Click Yes.

The registration email is sent to the newly entered email address.

Resend Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal Registration Email to a UserIf a user has lost the email that was sent for registering to the Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal, CiscoPartner or customer administrator can resend the registration email.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click User Management. The User Management page is displayed.Step 4 Click Resend Registration Email from the Actions menu for the desired user.Step 5 Click OK.

The registration email is sent to the user. User must re-register to log in to the Cisco Business Edition SelfcarePortal.

Resend Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal Registration Email to All Users

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from "Actions" menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click User Management. The User Management page is displayed.Step 4 Choose Resend Registration Email from the Bulk Edit drop-down list.Step 5 Click Resend All.

The registration email is sent to all the users. Users must re-register to log in to Cisco Business Edition SelfcarePortal.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide106

Manage Your SiteResend Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal Registration Email to a User

Page 117: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Reset Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal Password for a User

Before you begin

The user must be registered to the Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click User Management. The User Management page is displayed.Step 4 Click Reset Password from the Actions menu for the desired user.Step 5 Click OK.

The current password is erased and password reset instruction email is sent. User must change the passwordto log in to Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal.

Reset Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal Password for All Users

Before you begin

The user must be registered to the Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click User Management. The User Management page is displayed.Step 4 Choose Reset Password from the Bulk Edit drop-down list.Step 5 Click Reset All.

All the current passwords are erased and password reset instruction email is sent to all registered users. Usersmust change their passwords to log in to Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal.

Delete a UserBE4000 supports deleting a user. Deleting a user releases the extension and removes the phone settings fromthe system.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide107

Manage Your SiteReset Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal Password for a User

Page 118: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click User Management. The User Management page is displayed.Step 4 Choose Delete User from the Actions menu for the desired user.Step 5 Click Delete.

ExtensionsAn extension number is a unique number that is assigned to an employee in an organization. An employeecan have more than one extension number.

Dial Plan for your organization defines the number of digits for an extension and the maximum number ofextensions that can be configured at a site. Cisco partner configures the dial plan during the site creation.Contact Cisco partner if you need more details on dial plan configured for a site.

Add an ExtensionWhile adding an extension, you can also configure call forwarding, single number reach, voicemail capabilities,and other calling features for an extension.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from "Actions" menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Extensions. The Manage Extensions page is displayed.Step 4 Click Add Extension.Step 5 Enter the information in the fields. For field descriptions, refer Extensions - Field Descriptions, on page 109Step 6 Click the arrows at the bottom of the screen to move to next screen or to go back to the previous screen.Step 7 Click Yes.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide108

Manage Your SiteExtensions

Page 119: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Extensions - Field Descriptions

Table 12: Add Extension

DescriptionField

Extension number that is associated with the end user.

Note • Enter a minimum of 3 digits for an extension. Maximumnumber of digits in an extension can go up to 5.

• You cannot create an extension with leading zero.

• The first digit of the extension cannot be the same as the digitused for dialing an outside line, sending a call to voicemailautomatically, and dialing an intercom extension.

Extension

Display name for the end user. The name entered here is displayed on thecalled phone device when a call is received from this extension. You canenter a maximum of 30 characters.

Display Name

This field appears only while modifying an extension.Note

Extension label is the text that is associated with the extension. The text addedfor the extension label appears on the line button. By default, the extensionlabel is taken as the combination of display name and the extension number.For example, if you are adding with display name as "John" and the extensionas "3456", the default extension label is "John-3456".

Extension Label

• User—An extension that is assigned to the end user. Youmust configurean email address associated with the end user.

• Public—An extension that is assigned to a phone that is meant forgeneral use bymany end users. You need not configure an email address.For example, the extension assigned to a phone in the conference room.

User Type

Allows the extension to become dynamic member of a Hunt Group.Hunt Group Login

Table 13: Create End User

DescriptionField

First name of the end user.First Name

Last Name of the end user.Last Name

Email address of the end user. Cisco Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portalregistration link is sent to this email address.

Email Address

Voicemail to email feature is enabled for this extension. Any voicemailcoming to this extension is sent as an email attachment to the registered emailaddress.

Enable Voicemail

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide109

Manage Your SiteExtensions - Field Descriptions

Page 120: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

This check box is not available while modifying an extension.Note

Enables the end user to receive voicemail as an email attachment.

Enable VM to Email check box is visible only when the EnableVoicemail check box is checked.

Note

Enable VM to Email

Message waiting indicator (MWI) is a lamp that is lit on end user's phone toindicate a waiting voicemail message. Enables MWI functionality for an enduser.

Enable MWI check box is available only when the EnableVoicemail check box is checked.

Note

Enable MWI

Table 14: Single Number Reach (SNR)

DescriptionField

Single Number Reach (SNR) provides end users the choice of answering an incoming call on their deskphone using a mobile phone (cellular network) or a Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) phone.On enabling SNR, an incoming call rings both on the desk phone and the mobile phone (or PSTN phone).End users can answer the call either on their desk phone or from the mobile phone (or PSTN phone) basedon their convenience. An active call can be swapped between the desk phone and the mobile phone (PSTNphone) without disconnecting the call.

The number for Single Number Reach (SNR) functionality.

When entering the SNR number, you must start with the prefix todial an outside line, followed by Country Code, NationalDestination Code (Area Code), and Subscriber Number. Forexample, if 9 is the digit to dial an outside line, 1 is the countrycode, 555 is the area code, and 9999999 is the subscriber number,you must enter 915559999999.

Note

SNR Number

An incoming call is forwarded to the SNR number when the call is notanswered on the desk phone.

Call Forward No-Answer

Calling party number displayed on the configured mobile phone is replacedwith the SNR extension number.

Calling Number Local

Number of seconds up to which a phone rings before transferring the call toconfigured SNR number. Range = 0 to 10 seconds. Default = 1.

SNR Delay (0-10 secs)

Number of seconds up to which phone rings after the configured SNR delay.When the timeout value is reached, incoming call display is stopped on thedesk phone and the call gets forwarded to the configured SNR number. Range= 5 to 60 seconds. Default = 10.

SNR Timeout (5-60 secs)

An incoming call stops ringing on the desk phone after the call is answeredfrom a mobile phone and conversely.

Ring Stop

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide110

Manage Your SiteExtensions - Field Descriptions

Page 121: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Number of seconds up to which Single Number Reach (SNR) calls areprevented from being diverted to the voicemail box of a mobile phone. Range= 1 to 5 seconds.

Answer Too Soon (1-5 secs)

Table 15: Call Forward

DescriptionField

You cannot forward calls to your own extension. Enter an extension other than your own extensionin the following fields.

Note

All the incoming calls are forwarded to another number (such as extension,auto attendant).

The following options are available in the drop-down list:

• No Action

• Outside Number—Enter the number in the text field.

• Extension—Choose the extension from the drop-down list for availableextensions.

• Voicemail

• Auto Attendant—Choose the auto attendant option from the drop-downlist.

All

The incoming calls are forwarded to another extension, voicemail box, or anoutside number, only when the extension is busy.

The following options are available in the drop-down list:

• No Action

• Outside Number—Enter the number in the text field.

• Extension—Choose the extension from the drop-down list for availableextensions.

• Voicemail

• Auto Attendant—Choose the auto attendant option from the drop-downlist.

Busy

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide111

Manage Your SiteExtensions - Field Descriptions

Page 122: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

When the extension is unregistered to BE4000, the calls are forward to anotherextension, voicemail box, or an outside number. An extension can be inunregistered state when the phone device is unplugged or the network betweenthe BE4000 and the extension is not functional.

The following options are available in the drop-down list:

• No Action

• Outside Number—Enter the number in the text field.

• Extension—Choose the extension from the drop-down list for availableextensions.

• Voicemail

• Auto Attendant—Choose the auto attendant option from the drop-downlist.

Unregistered

The incoming calls are forwarded to to another number (such as extension,auto attendant).

The following options are available in the drop-down list:

• No Action

• Outside Number—Enter the number in the text field.

• Extension—Choose the extension from the drop-down list for availableextensions.

• Voicemail

• Auto Attendant—Choose the auto attendant option from the drop-downlist.

If Single Number Reach (SNR) is enabled, the number that isconfigured for "Call Forward No-Answer" on the "Single NumberReach (SNR)" page takes precedence.

Note

No-Answer

Time in seconds up to which a call rings on the extension when no oneanswers. After this time out period, the call gets forwarded to configuredextension, voicemail box, or an outside number.

No-Answer Timeout (3-60000secs)

Table 16: Additional Settings

DescriptionField

Extension is not associated with an external proxy server.Not Register Number

Extension automatically answers any inbound call.Auto Answer

Answer an incoming call on the extensions belonging to any pick-up group.Press GPickup followed by * on the phone to answer the pickup group call.

Pickup Call

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide112

Manage Your SiteExtensions - Field Descriptions

Page 123: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Associate the extension with a pick-up group. 1 is the default pickup groupcreated by the BE4000.

Pickup Group

Allows extension to make calls that are blocked in the dial plan.Allow calls to blockednumbers

The incoming calls that ring during the night service period on the extensionsends an alert indication to all extensions that are marked to receive nightservice bell notification. The alert notification is in the form of a splash ring(not associated with any of the individual lines on the phone) and a visibledisplay of the extension. The phone users retrieve the call by pressing thePickup softkey.

The following options are available in the drop-down list:

• No Action

• Outside Number—Enter the number in the text field.

• Extension—Choose the extension from the drop-down list for availableextensions.

• Voicemail

• Auto Attendant—Choose the auto attendant option from the drop-downlist.

Night Service Bell

The incoming calls are forwarded to another extension, voicemail box, or anoutside number during night service hours.

Only when the Night Service Bell check box is checked, theForwarding Number text field appears.

Note

Forwarding Number

One extension can be shared across multiple phone devices.

If you assign an extension on more than one phone device usingtheButtons page underManage Site > Phones > Modify Phone,the Shared Line check box under Manage Site > Extensions >Modify Extensions > Additional Settings gets checkedautomatically and cannot be unchecked.

Note

Shared Line

This field is visible only when you check the Shared Line checkbox.

Note

Set the maximum number of calls that can be answered for the sharedextension.

Example: Consider that extension 1001 is shared on 3 phones and themaximum number of calls configured for the shared line is 2. At any time,there cannot be more than 2 active calls going on for 1001 on all the 3 phones.

Max Calls (2-16)

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide113

Manage Your SiteExtensions - Field Descriptions

Page 124: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Table 17: Add Phone

DescriptionField

Every extension must be associated with a phone type for it to be available for provisioningthrough the Extension Assigner. Hence, we recommend you to add a phone while adding theextension. You can also add phone, under Manage Site > Phones.

Note

List of supported phone models. By default, Cisco IP Phone 7841 is chosen.Phone Type

• Internal—Privileges to call numbers that are internal to the organization.

• International—Privileges to call all numbers including internationalnumbers.

• Local—Privileges to call numbers within the same area code.

• Local-Plus—Privileges to call numbers within the same area code withplus dialing.

• National—Privileges to call numbers within the same nation code.

• National-Plus—Privileges to call numbers within the same nation codewith plus dialing.

COR

Add Extensions in BulkPost BE4000 site deployment, you can add extensions (including the phone types) in bulk. The total numberof extensions cannot exceed 200 at any time. So, the number of extensions that can be added post sitedeployment depends on the number of existing extensions.

Before you begin

Ensure that the existing number of extensions are less than 200.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site in the "Actions" column corresponding to the desired site.Step 3 Click Extensions.Step 4 Click Import Stations on the "Manage Extensions" page.

You can enter the user details in two ways:

• Click “Add Row” and add the user details one by one.

• Download the template that is provided on the screen. Fill in the details and upload all users' details inone go.

For field descriptions, refer Import Stations - Field Descriptions, on page 115.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide114

Manage Your SiteAdd Extensions in Bulk

Page 125: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 5 Click Yes to apply your changes.

Import Stations - Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Choose a type of user:

• User—An extension assigned to the user. You must configure an email addressassociated with the user.

• Public—An extension assigned to a phone that is meant for general use by manyusers. You need not configure an email address. For example, the extension assignedto a phone in the conference room.

Type

Enter the first name of the user.First Name

Enter the last name of the user.Last Name

Enter the display name of the user. The name entered here is displayed on the phonealong with the extension number. You can enter a maximum of 12 characters.

Display Name

Enter the email address of the user. The top-level domain in the email address cancontain up to six characters.

Email address must not be more than 32 characters in length. Only letters,numbers, and the characters underscore (_), dot (.), and dash (-) are allowedin the user ID portion of the email address. Do not use spaces in the emailaddress.

Note

Email

Enter the extension number assigned to the user.

Note • Enter a minimum of 3 digits for an extension. Maximum number ofdigits in an extension can go up to 5.

• You cannot create an extension with leading zero.

• The first digit of the extension cannot be the same as the digit used fordialing an outside line, sending a call to voicemail automatically, anddialing an intercom extension.

Extension

Choose the phone model associated with the extension. For the list of supported phonemodels, refer to “Supported Phones” section in the Cisco Business Edition 4000 ReleaseNotes.

Phone Type

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide115

Manage Your SiteImport Stations - Field Descriptions

Page 126: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Choose the Class of Restriction (COR) for the extension. COR allows you to chooseone of the calling privileges:

• internal

• local

• local-plus

• national

• national-plus

• international

COR

Enable or disable voicemail functionality.Voicemail

Enter the Single Number Reach (SNR) number for an extension.

SNR allows you to answer the incoming calls on the desk phone or from amobile phone.You can also swap active calls on a desk phone or at a remote destination withoutdisconnecting the call. You should include the area code and any additional digits thatare required to obtain an outside line prefix to your destination number. Example—If9 is the digit to dial outside line, 1 is the country code, 555 is the area code, and 9999999is the subscriber number, you must enter 915559999999.

SNR

Deletes an entry.Delete

Replace an exiting list with an entirely new list.Replace this list

Add more rows to populate the stations list.Add Row

Allows you to download a customized template. Template should be of .csv format.DownloadTemplate

Modify an ExtensionIf there is any change in an employee's phone system or calling features, you can modify the extension.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Extensions. The Manage Extensions page is displayed.Step 4 Click Modify Extension from the Actions menu for the desired Extension.Step 5 Modify the information as desired.

You can modify all field information except for the Extension.Note

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide116

Manage Your SiteModify an Extension

Page 127: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 6 Click Yes.

Shared LineThe concept of sharing one extension across multiple phone devices is called Shared Line. When there is anincoming call to the extension, all the phones that have the extension shared, rings at a time. You can answerthe call from any preferred phone.

Example: The extension of the Dr. John is shared with the personal assistant, Ms. Nancy. The incoming callsring on both the Dr. John's phone and Ms. Nancy's phone. Thus, either Dr. John or Ms. Nancy can answer theincoming call.

To enable shared line, check the Shared Line check box on the Additional Settings page under ManageSite > Extensions > Modify Extensions. Then, navigate to Manage Site > Phones > Modify Phone >Buttons page corresponding to the phones on which you want the extension to be shared, and select theextension.

You cannot uncheck the Shared Line check box for an extension that is shared with another phone. Beforeyou uncheck the Shared Line check box, remove the extension from the phone that shares the line.

Note

You can set the maximum number of active calls for a shared line in the Max Calls (2-16) field on theAdditional Settings page under Manage Site > Extensions > Modify Extensions.

SIP shared line allows multiple SIP phones to share a common directory number. For BE4000, you canconfigure a maximum of 16 phones in one shared line.

Note

Example: Consider that extension 1001 is shared on 3 phones and the maximum number of calls configuredfor the shared line is 2. At any time, there cannot be more than 2 active calls going on for 1001 on all the 3phones.

If you assign an extension on more than one phone device using the Buttons page under Manage Site >Phones > Modify Phone, the Shared Line check box underManage Site > Extensions > Modify Extensions> Additional Settings gets checked automatically and cannot be unchecked.

Note

PhonesYou can add new phones and provision the phones using extension assigner. A maximum of 200 phones canbe configured at your site.

Adding a phone at your site involves the following steps:

1. Add a New Phone , on page 118

2. Provision the Phone Using Extension Assigner, on page 120

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide117

Manage Your SiteShared Line

Page 128: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

The line buttons on the phone (including KEM) get configured sequentially. You cannot skip any button ororganize the buttons as you desire.

Note

Add a New PhoneYou can add a maximum of 200 phones.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Phones.Step 4 Click Add Phone.Step 5 Enter the information in the fields. For field description, refer Phones - Field Descriptions, on page 118Step 6 Click the arrows at the bottom of the screen to move to next screen or to go back to the previous screen.Step 7 Click Yes.

Phones - Field Descriptions

Table 18: Basic Info

DescriptionField

List of supported phone models.Phone Type

Extension number that is assigned to the end user.Extension

Class of Restriction (COR). Enables the restrictions on the type of calls thatare placed from the phone.

COR

Name for the phone. You can enter a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 12characters.

Device Name

The maximum number of calls that are allowed on an octo-line directorynumber before activating Call Forward Busy or a busy tone.

Busy Trigger per Button(1-50)

Transport protocol.

• TCP

• UDP

By default, TCP is selected.

Session Transport

Video calling is enabled on the phone.Video

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide118

Manage Your SiteAdd a New Phone

Page 129: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

This field is applicable only for Cisco ATA 190 Analog TelephoneAdapter.

Note

The MAC address of ATA-190.

MAC Address

Table 19: Advanced Options

DescriptionsField

Phone is prevented from initiating a conference to external numbers.Block Conference Pattern

Called digits are sent one by one as they are received from the calling device.Overlap signal

Blocks other users in the same shared line from viewing or handling anyactivities on the shared line.

Privacy is supported for shared-lines only.Note

Privacy

Assigns a line button as "Privacy" on the phone to toggle the Privacy modeon and off.

Note • Privacy Button can be enabled only when Privacy is enabled.

• Before enabling the Privacy button, ensure that at least oneline button is available for assigning the privacy button. If noline key is available on the phone, then the Privacy line buttonis assigned and the user does not get an option to toggle onand off privacy.

Privacy-button

Transfer restrictions are applied when a call transfer or conference is initiatedtoward external parties such as a PSTN trunk, SIP trunk.

Transfer to local extensions are exempted from this restriction.Note

Block Transfer-pattern

Password to access Interactive Voice Response (IVR) and change the defaultphone settings on Analog Telephone Adaptors.

ATA-IVR-Password

Maximum number of digits that are dialed for a call transfer.Transfer Max-Length

Local directory service on the phones is available. By default,Local Directorycheck box is checked.

Local Directory

Local services on a phone’s My Phone Apps interface is made available. Bydefault, My Phone Apps check box is checked.

My Phone Apps

Table 20: Buttons

DescriptionField

You can assign an extension, speed dial, or BLF speed dial for the buttons on the phone. Click the Actionscolumn corresponding to the desired button to edit or add a task for button.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide119

Manage Your SitePhones - Field Descriptions

Page 130: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

• Extension

• Intercom

• Speed Dial

• BLF Speed Dial

Note • When an extension is shared betweenmultiple phones, ensurethat you check the Shared Line check box on the ModifyExtensions > Advanced Settings page.

• The buttons on the phone are configured based on thefollowing preference order:

1. Extension

2. Intercom

3. Speed Dial

4. BLF Speed Dial

Type

Number to configure as an extension, speed dial, or BLF speed dial.Number

Name that is displayed for the button on the phone.Name

Provision the Phone Using Extension AssignerExtension Assigner allows you to assign an extension to a new or replacement IP phone.

Before you begin

• Note down the extension that needs to be configured for the user from the Cisco Business Edition SelfcarePortal (Manage Site > Extension)

• BE4000 is accessible and your site is in the Online state

• If you are provisioning Cisco Wireless IP Phone 8821, ensure that you have configured the phone withthe wireless LAN. For more information, see Add Cisco Wireless IP Phone 8821 to the Wireless LAN,on page 60.

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the phone to the network. The phone gets assigned with a temporary extension.Step 2 Dial the Extension Assigner directory number 70000; When prompted for password, enter 1234.Step 3 Enter the pound (#) key.Step 4 Enter the permanent extension that has been configured on the portal for this user followed by the pound (#)

key.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide120

Manage Your SiteProvision the Phone Using Extension Assigner

Page 131: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 5 Enter 1 followed by the pound (#) key to assign the extension.

Troubleshooting Phone ProvisioningIf the provisioned phone is in the unregistered mode, check the following:

• Whether the phone is connected to power and is operational

• Whether the phone has an IP address and the TFTP address. If the MAC address is correct, phones musthave lost its connection to BE4000. Unplug and plug the phones to the BE4000 network again

• If the phone is unregistered even if the IP address and TFTP address are configured correctly, checkwhether BE4000 is reachable from the phone. If the phone is faulty, you have to replace the phone

• Verify whether your site in Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal is in the Online state

• Try resetting the phone. On the phone display, chooseApplications > Admin Settings > Reset Settings> All.

Monitor Phones That Are UnregisteredWhen the phone attempts to register to BE4000, the phone displays a status message (either registered orunregistered). You can view the Offline or Not Registered phones on the Manage Phones page. Unregisteredphones are monitored in real time.

Access Admin Settings on Phone

Procedure

Step 1 On the phone, press Applications.Step 2 Select Admin Settings.Step 3 Enter the password:

a) If you are accessing Admin Settings before provisioning the phone, enter adg234.b) If you are accessing Admin Settings after provisioning the phone, enter ptwmjg.

Step 4 Press Sign-In.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide121

Manage Your SiteTroubleshooting Phone Provisioning

Page 132: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

View Phone Firmware Version and IP AddressThe columns containing IP address and phone firmware version are hidden by default. Perform the followingsteps to view the columns.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site > Phones from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Edit Columns.Step 4 Check the IP Address and Version check boxes.Step 5 Click Update.

Two new columns are displayed with the IP address and phone firmware version details.

In some scenarios, if the phone firmware information that is extracted from the BE4000 appliancecontains special characters, the firmware version is displayed as "--".

Note

Replace a Phone

Do not delete the phone from the Portal. Deleting the phone from the portal removes all user-specificcustomizations such as speed dials, single number reach, call forward.

Note

You can replace a faulty phone device or upgrade to a new phone model. Replacing the phone involves thefollowing steps:

1. Unplug the existing or faulty phone from the network.

2. Connect the new phone to the network.

3. Provision the new phone using Extension Assigner. For detailed steps, refer Provision the Phone UsingExtension Assigner, on page 120.

Reassign Phone to a Different UserWhen there is a change in the user who is using the phone device, you can reassign the same phone device tothe new user.

Procedure

Step 1 Delete the extension that was previously associated with the phone from the BE4000 Partner Portal. Go toManage Sites > Extensions > Manage Extensions and click Delete from the Actions menu corresponding tothe desired extension.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide122

Manage Your SiteView Phone Firmware Version and IP Address

Page 133: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 2 Add an extension for the new user who uses the phone device in BE4000 Partner Portal. For details on addingan extension, refer Add an Extension , on page 108.

Step 3 Use Extension Assigner to provision the phone with the extension associated with the new user. For detailson Extension Assigner, refer Provision the Phone Using Extension Assigner, on page 120.

Reset PhoneCisco Unified IP phones must be rebooted (reset) after making any configuration changes so that the changestake effect. Configurations for phones are downloaded afresh when the phone is rebooted.

Reset Phone from the BE4000 Portal

Before you begin

Phone must be in "Registered" state.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site > Phones for the desired site from the Actions menu.Step 3 Click Reset from "Action" menu on the Manage Phones page.Step 4 Click Yes. The phones go offline temporarily for a few seconds and will not be able to make or receive calls

until they come back online.

Reset All Phones from the BE4000 Portal

Before you begin

Phones must be in "Registered" state.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site > Phones for the desired site from the "Actions" menu.Step 3 Click Bulk Action.Step 4 Choose Reset all phones.Step 5 ClickReset. The phones go offline temporarily for a few seconds and will not be able to make or receive calls

until they come back online.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide123

Manage Your SiteReset Phone

Page 134: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Reset Phone Using Phone Softkeys

Before you begin

Phone must be in "Registered" state.

Procedure

Step 1 Press Applications.Step 2 Select My Phone Apps > Reset Phone. The phone gets unregistered and registered again.

Add a Key Expansion ModuleKey Expansion Modules add extra buttons to the Cisco IP Phone 8800 Series phone. The buttons can beconfigured as Extension, Speed Dial, and BLF Speed Dial.

Key Expansion Module cannot be added during initial site deployment in the Setup Assistant. You can addonly after the site is successfully deployed.

Note

To add a Key Expansion Module to your Cisco IP Phone 8800 Series, perform the following tasks:

Table 21: Add a Key Expansion Module—Task Flow

ReferencePrerequisitePurposeTaskStep

Add a KeyExpansion Moduleon the BE4000Portal, on page 125

Site is in the Onlinestate

Add a KeyExpansion Modulefor the Cisco IPPhone 8800 Serieson the BE4000portal.

Add a KeyExpansion Moduleon the BE4000Portal

Step 1

Connect a KeyExpansion Moduleto a Cisco IP Phone, on page 125

Key ExpansionModule is adding onthe BE4000 portal

Connect the KeyExpansion Modulemodule to the CiscoIP Phone 8800Series phone. Aftersuccessfullyconnected, KeyExpansion Modulepulls theconfigurations fromthe portal.

(Task performed onthe site) Connect aKey ExpansionModule to a CiscoIP Phone

Step 2

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide124

Manage Your SiteReset Phone Using Phone Softkeys

Page 135: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Add a Key Expansion Module on the BE4000 Portal

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Phones.Step 4 Click Modify Phone from the Actions menu for the desired phone.Step 5 Choose the desired number of KEMs from the Add-on Module drop-down list on the Basic Info page.Step 6 Click the arrows at the bottom of the screen to move to next screens.Step 7 Choose an action for each button from the Type drop-down list on the Buttons page. Enter the details based

on your selection.Step 8 Click Yes.

Connect a Key Expansion Module to a Cisco IP PhoneRefer to Cisco IP Phone Key Expansion Module for detailed steps on connecting a Key Expansion Moduleto a Cisco IP Phone.

ConferenceConference feature allows end users to involve three or more parties in a call. BE4000 supports both Built-inBridge and Hardware Conference.

Built-In BridgeBuilt-in Bridge is enabled by default in the BE4000 and allows the end users to host conference calls involvinga maximum of three parties. For conference calls using the built-in bridge, the DSP resources that are availablein the phone hardware is used.

End users can start a conference by pressing the Transfer button on the phone.

Hardware ConferenceHardware conference uses the DSP resources that are available in the BE4000 appliance. Hardware conferencecan be either Ad-hoc orMeet-me. Cisco Partners or Customer Administrators can enable hardware conferencepost site deployment under Manage Site > Conferencing.

When hardware conference is enabled, Built-in bridge gets disabled automatically.Note

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide125

Manage Your SiteAdd a Key Expansion Module on the BE4000 Portal

Page 136: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Ad-Hoc ConferenceAd-Hoc conference allows BE4000 to host conference calls involving a maximum of 8 parties. End users canpress the Transfer button on phone to start an ad-hoc conference call.

Cisco Partners and Customer Administrators can enable Ad-hoc conferencing.

Meet-me ConferenceMeet-Me conference requires the end users to dial a predetermined Meet-me conference number. CiscoPartners or Customer Administrators can configure the meet-me conference numbers. Meet-me conferencecan involve a maximum of 8 parties.

Meet-Me Conference Dependency on CodecsThe number of Meet-me conference bridges that can be configured depends on the codecs that are configuredfor the site. The following are the number ofMeet-me conference bridges that are allowed based on the codecs:

Maximum Number of Simultaneous Meet-meConferences Allowed

Codec Enabled

5g711ulaw

5g711alaw

3g729r8

3g722-64

—ilbc

Enable Hardware Conference

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site > Conferencing.Step 3 Turn on the slider to enable hardware conferencing.

The slider is unavailable if “ilbc” is selected as the SIP codec.Note

Step 4 Enter the Meet-me conference numbers in the “Extensions” field. The number of Meet-me conferences thatcan be enabled depends on the codecs selected. For more information, refer Meet-Me Conference Dependencyon Codecs, on page 126.

• Meet-me conference meeting number must have same number of digits as that of an extension.

• The first digit of the Meet-me conference number cannot be the same as the digit used fordialing an outside line, sending a call to voicemail automatically, and dialing an intercomextension.

Note

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide126

Manage Your SiteAd-Hoc Conference

Page 137: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 5 Click the arrow at the bottom of the screen.Step 6 Click Yes to save the changes.

Privacy and Privacy Button

Privacy and Privacy Button features must be enabled on shared lines only.Note

Privacy

Privacy feature blocks other users in the same shared line from viewing or handling any activities on theshared line. Privacy can be enabled on per phone basis. If one phone has multiple shared lines, Privacy isenabled for all the shared lines.

Privacy is disabled on all phones by default. A Cisco Partner or a Customer Administrator can enable Privacyon desired phones post-site deployment.

Privacy can be enabled by checking the Privacy check box on the "Additional Settings" page while addingand modifying phone under Manage Site > Phones > Manage Phone.

Privacy Button

Privacy Button can be enabled only when Privacy is enabled.Note

Privacy Button feature provides an option to toggle the privacy mode on and off by the end user on the phone.

When Privacy Button is enabled, a line button on the phone gets labeled as “Privacy”. Before enabling thePrivacy button, ensure that at least one line button is available for assigning the privacy button. If line buttonis not available on the phone, then the end user does not get an option to toggle the privacy mode on and off.

A Cisco Partner or a Customer Administrator can enable Privacy Button by checking the Privacy Buttoncheck box on the "Additional Settings" page while adding andmodifying phone underManage Site > Phones> Manage Phone.

When a phone receives an incoming call on a shared line, the end user can make the call private by pressingthe Privacy line button.

Once Privacy Button is enabled, the "Privacy" mode is on by default for all shared lines on the phone. Totoggle the Privacy mode on and off, end users can press the Privacy line button.

If Privacy is enabled and Privacy Button is disabled, then the end user does not get an option to toggle thePrivacy mode on and off.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide127

Manage Your SitePrivacy and Privacy Button

Page 138: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Barge

Barge is enabled for shared lines only.Note

The Barge feature enables phone users who share a directory number to join an active call on the shared line.Barge uses the built-in conference bridge on the target phone (the phone that is being barged) which limitsthe number of users allowed to barge. A barge conference supports up to three parties. When the initiatorbarges into a call, a conference is created between the barge initiator, the target party, and the other partyconnected in the call. Parties see the call information on their phones. If a phone that is using the shared linehas Privacy enabled, call information does not appear on the other phones that share the line and the callcannot be barged.

Connected parties hear the barge tone (single beep) after the conference is set up. When a party leaves theconference, a barge leave tone is played to the remaining parties.

Cisco Partners or Customer Administrators can enable "Barge" softkey on end users phone. Check theEnableBarge Softkey under "Shared Line Settings" section of the Additional Settings page under Manage Site >Phone > Add Phone and Manage Site > Phones > Modify Phone.

Enterprise Line Key

Enterprise Line Key (ELK) is supported only on the Cisco IP Phone 8800 Series for BE4000.Note

Enterprise Line Key allows you to use the buttons on both sides of the phone screen. For example, EnterpriseLine key supports the use of all the ten buttons on a Cisco IP Phone 8865.

You can see all the ten buttons in the Buttons page under Manage Site > Phones > Modify Phone if ELKis enabled. When ELK is not enabled, the page displays only the five buttons.

The phone buttons can be configured for Extension, Intercom, Speed Dial, or BLF Speed Dial. The buttonsin the phone are configured in the following preference order:

1. Extension

2. Intercom

3. Speed Dial

4. BLF Speed Dial

The Enterprise Line Key is not enabled by default.

Cisco IP Phone 8800 Series with Enterprise Line KeyThe Cisco IP Phone 8800 Series phone displays the following lights to indicate the state:

• Flashing Amber—Incoming call

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide128

Manage Your SiteBarge

Page 139: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• Steady Green—Active call

• Flashing Green—Call on Hold

For the Enterprise Line Key (ELK) support offered on BE4000, the Cisco IP Phone 8800 Series behavior isas follows:

If ELK is disabled, directory numbers aren’t assigned to the line keys on the right side of the phone screen.Note

Table 22: Cisco IP Phone 8800 Series Phone Behavior with ELK

ELK DisabledELK EnabledFeature

For an incoming call, the line keyon the right side of phone screendisplays Flashing Amber. Press theAnswer softkey. Once the call isanswered, steady green is displayedon the line key.

For an incoming call, the line keyon the phone screen displaysFlashing Amber. Press theAnswersoftkey. Once the call is answered,steady green is displayed on theline key.

Call Answering

For a second or subsequentincoming call, the line key on theright side of the phone screendisplays flashing amber. The linekey flashing amber is below the linekey with active call.

For a second or subsequentincoming call, the line key withactive call displays flashing amber.

Call Waiting or Call QueueIndication

If your second call is active, pressthe line key (on the right side ofphone screen) corresponding to thefirst call. Press the resume softkeyto resume the first call.

If your second call is active and youneed to resume the first call, pressthe same line key with active callto display the menu. Use four-waynavigation button to select thenumber corresponding to the firstcall. Press the resume softkey toresume the first call.

Call Resume

The incoming call is displayed onthe phone screen, with thesubsequent calls listed one belowthe other. Press the correspondingline key on the right with flashingamber to answer a call or performrequired action.

Press the line button with activecall to display the menu. Use thefour-way navigation button toselect the number and perform therequired action.

Caller ID Display

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide129

Manage Your SiteCisco IP Phone 8800 Series with Enterprise Line Key

Page 140: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

ELK DisabledELK EnabledFeature

If there’s a second incoming call,line key on the right displaysFlashing Amber. Press the line keythat displays Flashing Amber toanswer the second call. When thesecond incoming call is answered,the first call is put on hold and thecorresponding line key displaysflashing green. The line key withthe new active call displays steadygreen.

If there’s a second incoming call,the line key with active call itselfdisplays flashing amber. Press theline key that displays flashingamber to answer the incoming call.A menu is displayed. Scroll downusing the four-way navigationbutton to select the secondincoming call. Press the Answersoftkey. Now the second call isactive, and the first call is put onhold. The line key displays flashinggreen.

Call Handling withMultiple ActiveCalls

All the other features supported in BE4000 retain their behavior, irrespective of whether ELK is enabled ornot.

Note

Enable Enterprise Line Key

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site for the desired site from the Actions menu.Step 3 Click Setting > System Settings.Step 4 Check the Enable Enterprise Line Key Support check box.Step 5 Click Save.

Private IP Address RangesIP addresses used for provisioning the phones must be allowed in RFC 1918 (10.0.0.8 /16, 172.16.0.0 /12,192.168.0.0 /16). If the IP address that is used for provisioning phone is other than the ones allowed in RFC1918, the phone provisioning fails. To avoid such phone provisioning issues, you must enter the IP addressesin the Private IP Ranges page. You can add individual IP address (host address) in the x.x.x.x format or anIP address range (subnet) in the x.x.x.x /n format.

Cisco Partners can add IP addresses during the initial site deployment on the Private IP Ranges page. Postsite deployment, both Cisco Partners and Customer Administrators can add private IP addresses, underManageSites > Settings > Private IP Ranges.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide130

Manage Your SiteEnable Enterprise Line Key

Page 141: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Personal Voicemail BoxPersonal voicemail box is assigned to a specific user and is accessible only by that user. When a caller leavesa message in the voicemail box, the message waiting indicator (MWI) light turns on.

You can specify the maximum quota for the voicemail box for every user using the portal. The default voicemailbox size is 10 minutes with maximum message size of 2 minutes.

Set Up Personal Voicemail Box for a User

Procedure

Step 1 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 2 Click Personal Voicemail Box.Step 3 Click Add Voicemail.Step 4 Enter the information in the fields. For field descriptions, refer Personal Voicemail Box - Field Descriptions,

on page 131.Step 5 Click the arrows at the bottom of the screen to move to next screen or to go back to the previous screen.Step 6 Click Yes.

Personal Voicemail Box - Field Descriptions

Table 23: User Profile

DescriptionField

First name of the end user.First Name

Last name of the end user.Last Name

Display name for the end user. The name entered here is displayed on calledphone device when a call is received from this extension.

Display Name

Personal Identification Number (PIN). To manage your voicemail box fromthe phone, enter this PIN.

Pin(Optional)

Confirm Pin

Primary extension of the end user.Primary Extension

Primary extension of the end user in E.164 format.E.164 Number

Table 24: Voicemail Box

DescriptionField

Description for the personal voicemail box.Description

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide131

Manage Your SitePersonal Voicemail Box

Page 142: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Size of the voicemail box in seconds.Mailbox Size in sec

Maximum number of days up to which messages are stored in the voicemailbox.

Message Expiry Time in days

Maximum message storage size, in seconds.Message Size in secs

• Yes—Voicemail tutorial is played when the user enters the voicemailbox for the first time.

• No—Voicemail tutorial is not played when the user enters the voicemailbox for the first time.

Default—Yes.

Play Tutorial

• Standard—Enable, record, or download an active greeting

• Alternate—Enable, record, or download an alternate greeting

• Meeting—Enable, record, or download a meeting greeting

• Vacation—Enable, record, or download a vacation greeting

• Extended Absence—Enable, record, or download an extended-absencegreeting

• Busy—Enable, record, or download a busy greeting

• Closed—Enable, record, or download a closed greeting

• Internal—Enable, record, or download an internal greeting

Default—Standard.

Greeting Type

• None—Do not use a recording

• System-default—Use the system default recording

• User-Recording—Use the user recording

Default—User-Recording.

Recording Type

Callers can dial zero (0) from their phones to reach the system operator.Allow caller to dial 0

Enables the end user to receive voicemail as an email attachment.Enable VM to Email

Message waiting indicator (MWI) is a lamp that is lit on end user's phone toindicate a waiting voicemail message. Enables MWI functionality for an enduser.

Enable MWI check box is available only when the EnableVoicemail check box is checked.

Note

Enable MWI

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide132

Manage Your SitePersonal Voicemail Box - Field Descriptions

Page 143: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Table 25: Groups

DescriptionField

Groups to which the user belongs. Search for a group and click Add.Add Groups

Access Personal Voicemail BoxPress Messages on the phone and follow the voice prompts. To check messages for a specific line, pressthe line button first.

Set Up Personal Voicemail Box for a User Without an Assigned Phone

Procedure

Step 1 Created an extension for the user. For information on how to create an extension, refer Add an Extension ,on page 108.

Step 2 Create a Personal Voicemail Box for the user. Ensure that you specify PIN on the User Profile page. Forinformation on how to create a voicemail box, refer Set Up Personal Voicemail Box for a User, on page 131.

If you do not enter PIN, the user cannot configure the voicemail box.Note

Step 3 Communicate the PIN to the user.

What to do next

Users can access the configured voicemail box from any phone. For information on how to access the configuredvoicemail box, refer Access Personal Voicemail Box-Users Without an Assigned Phone, on page 133.

Access Personal Voicemail Box-Users Without an Assigned Phone

Before you begin

Collect the following information from your Customer Administrator:

• Extension

• PIN configured while creating the Personal Voicemail Box

Procedure

Step 1 Press Messages on the phone.

You are prompted to enter the password.

Step 2 Ignore the prompt and press *.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide133

Manage Your SiteAccess Personal Voicemail Box

Page 144: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

You are prompted to enter your ID.

Step 3 Enter your extension and press #.

You are prompted to enter the password.

Step 4 Enter the PIN that is configured in the portal while creating the personal voicemail box.Step 5 Follow the voice prompts.

Reach System Operator from a Personal Voicemail BoxEvery call is important for the organization and any unattended call can be business critical. BE4000 providesthe ability where none of the calls are unattended, even when callers reach a user's personal voicemail box.You can allow a caller to dial zero (0) after reaching a user's personal voicemail box and reach the systemoperator.

Example—John calls his client Edward, working in the ABC organization for a query. Edward is out of officeand hence John hears Edward’s personal voicemail box greeting, such as “Edward is out of office. Please dialzero to reach the system operator”. John dials 0 and the system operator, Lisa’s phone rings. Lisa answersJohn’s call and responds to his query.

A Cisco partner can configure the system operator number during the initial site deployment. If the systemoperator number is not configured during the initial site deployment, you can configure it post site deployment.You can configure one of the following as system operator number:

• Route to Extension—Any extension that is configured for the site.

• Route to Voicemail Box—Voicemail of any extension.

• Route to Hunt Group—Any hunt group that is configured for the site.

• Route to Group Voicemail Box—Any group voicemail box that is configured for the site.

• Route to Pilot Number—Any pilot number, such as Auto Attendant pilot number.

Configuring system operator for the site, enables all the personal voicemail boxes to allow its callers to dialzero for reaching the system operator.

Configure System Operator NumberBE4000 allows callers to dial zero after listening to a personal voicemail box greeting and reach the systemoperator.

Before you begin

Ensure that you have the details of the number to be configured for the system operator.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide134

Manage Your SiteReach System Operator from a Personal Voicemail Box

Page 145: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 2 Click Manage Site for the desired site from the Actions menu.Step 3 Click Setting > System Settings.Step 4 Choose the one of the following as the system operator target type from the Target Type drop-down list:

• Route to Extension—Any extension that is configured for the site.

• Route to Voicemail Box—Voicemail of any extension.

• Route to Hunt Group—Any hunt group that is configured for the site.

• Route to Group Voicemail Box—Any group voicemail box that is configured for the site.

• Route to Pilot Number—Any pilot number, such as Auto Attendant pilot number.

Step 5 Choose the number corresponding to the target type selected from the Target Number drop-down list.

The Allow caller to dial 0 check box on the Voicemail Box page is checked by default for all the extensionsthat have voicemail enabled (or have personal voicemail box configured). Hence, all the personal voicemailboxes allow its callers to dial zero for reaching the system operator. However, ensure that the Allow callerto dial 0 check box is not disabled for the personal voicemail boxes.

Note

What to do next

Cisco Partner or Customer Administrator communicates to all the users who have voicemail enabled (or havepersonal voicemail box configured) to record their personal greeting to include instructions on dialing zeroto reach system operator. For example, the user, Edward records his personal greeting as “Edward is out ofoffice. Please dial zero to reach the system operator”.

Configure Voicemail Description StyleCisco Partners and Customer Administrators can change the length of information played when end userscheck for voicemail messages on their phone.

The default option contains a set of information such as sender information, date and time of when the messagewas sent, reception date and time. You can choose to include or exclude some information with the followingoptions:

• Default—Contains sender information, date and time of when the message was sent, reception date andtime (if the message was received later than 30 minutes after it was sent), and other details such as themessage number, type, priority.

• Include Day of Week—Includes information on which day of week the message was received alongwith all the information available for default option.

• Brief—Shortens information that is read before messages in voicemail by omitting data about who sentthe messages. No longer reads the entire caller number or the recording time.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide135

Manage Your SiteConfigure Voicemail Description Style

Page 146: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site for the desired site from the Actions menu.Step 3 Click Setting > System Settings.Step 4 Choose a voicemail application narrator option from the Voicemail Description Style drop-down list.Step 5 Click Save.

Enable Voicemail Box Space Notification EmailsCisco Partners and Customer Administrators can configure the BE4000 to trigger an email notification whenthe users' voicemail box is nearly full.

When the voicemail box is more than 80 percent full, an email notificationVoicemail Box [XXXX] is NearlyFull is sent to the registered email address. When the voicemail box is 100 percent full, an email notificationVoicemail Box [XXXX] is Full is sent to the registered email address.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site for the desired site from the Actions menu.Step 3 Click Setting > System Settings.Step 4 Check the Enable mailbox space notification email check box.Step 5 Click Save.

What to do next

Delete obsolete voicemail messages from your voicemail box so that you can receive new voicemail messages.

Group Voicemail BoxBE4000 allows you to create a voicemail box specific to a group of users. This is called group voicemail box.All users belonging to the group can access the messages in the group voicemail box. When a caller leaves amessage in a group voicemail box, users' phones do not show message waiting indicator (MWI). To listen tothe messages in the group voicemail box, users must log in to their personal voicemail box (by pressingMessages on the phone). Only one user can access the group voicemail box at a time. After the first usersaves or deletes a message in the group voicemail box, the message is no longer played as "new" for anysubsequent users.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide136

Manage Your SiteEnable Voicemail Box Space Notification Emails

Page 147: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Add a Group Voicemail Box

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from the "Actions" menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Group Voicemail Box.Step 4 Click Add Voicemail.Step 5 Enter the information in the fields. For field description, refer Group Voicemail Box - Field Descriptions, on

page 137.Step 6 Click the arrows at the bottom of the screen to move to next screen or to go back to the previous screen.Step 7 Click Yes.

Group Voicemail Box - Field Descriptions

Table 26: Group Profile

DescriptionField

Name of the group. You can enter a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 12characters.

Group Name

Long name of the group as it appears on other phone display.Full Name

Description for the group.Description

Extension associated with the group.

The Primary Extension of the Group Voicemail Box cannot startwith the digit used for dialing an outside line, placing an intercomcall, and sending calls to voicemail automatically. The primaryextension cannot overlap with any existing extension, AutoAttendant Pilot Number, Hunt Group Pilot Number, and PagingNumber.

Note

Primary Extension

Phone number (including country and area code) associated with the group.E.164 Number

Privilege associated with the group. Search for the privilege and click Add.Privileges/Capabilities

Table 27: Owners/Members

DescriptionField

Users who own the group. Search for a user and click Add.

You must have at least one user as owner of the group.Note

Add Owners

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide137

Manage Your SiteAdd a Group Voicemail Box

Page 148: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Users who belong to the group.

You must have at least one user as member of the group.Note

Add Members

Table 28: Voicemail Box

DescriptionField

Description of the group.Description

Size of the voicemail box.Mailbox Size in secs

Maximum number of days up to which messages are stored in the voicemailbox.

Message Expiry Time in days

Maximum message storage size, in seconds.Message Size in secs

• Yes—Voicemail tutorial is played when the user enters the voicemailbox for the first time.

• No—Voicemail tutorial is not played when the user enters the voicemailbox for the first time.

Play Tutorial

• None—Do not use a recording

• System-default—Use the system default recording

• User-Recording—Use the user recording

Recording Type

• Standard—Enable, record, or download an active greeting.

• Alternate—Enable, record, or download an alternate greeting.

• Meeting—Enable, record, or download a meeting greeting

• Vacation—Enable, record, or download a vacation greeting

• Extended Absence—Enable, record, or download an extended-absencegreeting

• Busy—Enable, record, or download a busy greeting

• Closed—Enable, record, or download a closed greeting

• Internal—Enable, record, or download an internal greeting

Greeting Type

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide138

Manage Your SiteGroup Voicemail Box - Field Descriptions

Page 149: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Add Users to Group VoiceMail Box

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Group Voicemail Box.Step 4 Click Modify Group from the Actions menu for the desired group voicemail box.Step 5 Navigate to Owners/Members page.Step 6 Search for a user in the Add Members field and click Add.Step 7 Click the arrows at the bottom of the screen to move to next screen or to go back to the previous screen.Step 8 Click Yes.

Modify Owners of a Group Voicemail Box

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Group Voicemail Box.Step 4 Click Modify Group from the Actions menu for the desired group voicemail box.Step 5 Navigate to Owners/Members page.Step 6 Search for a user in the Modify Owners field and click Add.Step 7 Click the arrows at the bottom of the screen to move to next screen or to go back to the previous screen.Step 8 Click Yes.

Hunt GroupsHunt Groups allow incoming calls to a specific number (pilot number) to be directed to a defined group ofextension numbers. Incoming calls are redirected from the pilot number to the first extension number asdefined in the configuration. If the first number is busy or does not answer, the call is redirected to the nextphone in the list. A call remains redirected on busy or no answer from number to number in the list until it isanswered or until the call reaches the number that is defined as the final number.

A Hunt Group can have static and dynamic members.

• Static Members—Permanent members belonging to the Hunt Group.

• Dynamic Members—Not the permanent members, but they can join or unjoin a Hunt Group on a needbasis using the softkeys available on the phone.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide139

Manage Your SiteAdd Users to Group VoiceMail Box

Page 150: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• You can add a maximum of 20 Hunt Groups.

• The total number of members in a Hunt Group, including static and dynamic members cannot exceed32.

• If you check the "Allow dynamic members" check box on theHunt Groups page, ensure that you checkthe "Hunt Group Login" check box for each dynamicmember extension underManage Site > Extensions> Basic Info page.

• Once a Hunt Group is created, you cannot modify the Hunt Method. You have to delete and readd theHunt Group to modify the Hunt Method.

Note

A Cisco Partner can configure the hunt groups using the Setup Assistant in Cisco Business Edition 4000Management Portal during the initial site deployment. If the Cisco Partner has already created hunt groupsduring the initial deployment, a customer administrator can see them on Hunt Groups screen. A customeradministrator can also create a new hunt group and also modify the existing hunt groups.

If a phone belongs to multiple Hunt Groups, and an incoming call is received from one of the Hunt Groups,the name of the Hunt Group is displayed on the phone display.

Call QueuingBE4000 supports call queuing in Hunt Groups. When all agents in the hunt group are busy, incoming callswait in a queue until one of the agents become free. Thus, the calls are not disconnected but made to wait. Apre-recorded greeting is played while the callers wait in the queue. This is called "Comfort Greeting". Youcan set the frequency in which the comfort greeting is repeated to the incoming callers. Frequency rangesfrom 30 to 120 seconds and the default is 60 seconds. Thus, call queue enhances the experience of the incomingcallers.

Check the Enable Call Queuing check box on the "Hunt Groups" page to enable call queueing. Specify thedesired values in the Comfort Greeting frequency and Max Waiting Time fields.

BE4000 plays the following default comfort greeting:

All agents are currently busy assisting other customers. Continue to hold for assistance. Someone will be withyou shortly.

You cannot upload custom comfort greetings.Note

Add a New Hunt Group

Procedure

Step 1 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 2 Click Hunt Groups.Step 3 Click Add Hunt Groups.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide140

Manage Your SiteCall Queuing

Page 151: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 4 Enter the information in the fields. For field descriptions, refer Hunt Groups - Field Descriptions, on page141.

Step 5 Click the arrows at the bottom of the screen to move to next screen or to go back to the previous screen.Step 6 Click Yes.

Hunt Groups - Field DescriptionsSuggestions for Setting Up Hunt Group Timers

The Hunt Group page does not load any default values. You must set the values for the following fields basedon the selected Hunt Method.

• Member Timeout

• Comfort Greeting Frequency

• Max Waiting Time

For effective inbound call handling and providing a positive experience for inbound callers, we recommendyou to set the timers as per the following calculations:

Example for Parallel Hunt Method

Set the Comfort Greeting Frequency as two times the value of Member Timeout and the Max Waiting Timeas the value equal to that of Member Timeout.

Member Timeout = 30 seconds

Comfort Greeting Frequency = 2 x Member Timeout = 2 x 30 = 60 seconds

Max Waiting Time = Member Timeout = 30 seconds

Example for Peer, Sequential, and Longest Idle Hunt Methods

Set the Comfort Greeting Frequency as two times the value of Member Timeout and the Max Waiting Timeas Member Timeout value multiplied by the number of members in the Hunt Group.

Members in the Hunt Group = 5

Member Timeout = 30 seconds

Comfort Greeting Frequency = 2 x Member Timeout = 2 x 30 = 60 seconds

Max Waiting Time = Number of Members x Member Timeout = 5 x 30 = 150 seconds

DescriptionField

Enter a unique name for the hunt list. To easily identify the hunt list,consider appending the pilot extension to the name; for example, hl5001.Group name must contain a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 12characters.

Only the following characters are allowed: a-z, A-Z, 0-9,space, hyphen(-), and underscore (_)

Note

Group Name

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide141

Manage Your SiteHunt Groups - Field Descriptions

Page 152: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Enter a number to access the Hunt Group that serves as the pilot for thehunt list. This number serves as the trigger for hunting to begin. Pilotnumber can be any number equal to the length of extension. For example:

• If the extension length is 3, pilot number can be any number from000 to 999

• If the extension length is 4, pilot number can be any number from0000 to 9999

• If the extension length is 5, pilot number can be any number from00000 to 99999

Note • The Pilot Number of the Hunt Groups cannot be thesame as any existing extension and cannot start with thedigit that is used for sending calls to voicemailautomatically and for placing intercom calls.

• The Pilot Number of the Hunt Groups cannot be thesame as any existing Pickup Group number.

Pilot Number

Click Add to add members to this hunt group from the Stations page(ShowMember Directory). You can also search for the users by enteringmember name or extension. All extensions that are assigned to users ordepartments can be included as members of a Hunt Group. You mustadd a minimum of two members (can include dynamic members) for ahunt group.

Add Members

From the list of extensions that display, select which extensions mustbe included in the hunt list.

Click Show Member Directory, to select the list of extensions for thehunt list. Check the respective member's name and click OK.

Show Member Directory

Allows members that are not part of the Hunt Group to join and unjointhe Hunt Group on a need basis using the softkeys displayed on thescreen.

Allow dynamic members

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide142

Manage Your SiteHunt Groups - Field Descriptions

Page 153: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

This field is visible only when "Allow dynamic members" ischecked.

Note

Number of dynamic members allowed for the hunt group. A minimumof one dynamic member needs to be added.

Note • You can add a maximum of 20 Hunt Groups.

• The total number of members in a Hunt Group, includingstatic and dynamic members cannot exceed 32.

• If you check the "Allow dynamic members" check boxon the Hunt Groups page, ensure that you check the"Hunt Group Login" check box for each dynamicmember extension under Manage Site > Extensions >Basic Info page.

• Once a Hunt Group is created, you cannot modify theHunt Method. You have to delete and readd the HuntGroup to modify the Hunt Method.

Max dynamic members

Select how BE4000 distributes the calls to members of the hunt listbased on one of the following hunt methods:

• Longest-idle—BE4000 only distributes a call to idle members,starting from the longest idle member to the least idle member ofa hunt list.

• Parallel—Calls ring all numbers in that hunt group simultaneously.The extension to first answer the call is connected.

• Sequential—Call hunting always starts with the first member inthe hunt group. Continues to each number in the group in the orderin which they are listed, from top to bottom, in the hunt group.

• Peer—Call hunting starts with the extension immediately after theone that last rang. Ringing proceeds in a circular manner, that isfrom left to right. That is, BE4000 distributes a call to idle oravailable members starting from the (n+1)th member of a hunt list,where the nth member is the member to which BE4000 mostrecently extended a call. If the nth member is the last member ofa hunt list, BE4000 distributes a call starting from the top of thehunt list.

Once a Hunt Group is created, you cannot modify the HuntMethod. You have to delete and readd the Hunt Group tomodify the Hunt Method.

Note

Hunt Method

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide143

Manage Your SiteHunt Groups - Field Descriptions

Page 154: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

If no members of the hunt list are available to answer a call, you canchoose to perform one of the following:

• Disconnect Call—the call is disconnected.

• Route to Group Voicemail Box—the call is forwarded to a groupvoicemail box. Enter the email address and extension associatedwith the group voicemail box. Group Voicemail boxes are createdwith the first member of the hunt group as the user owner of thegroup.

Note • During initial deployment, a group voicemail boxis created including the members who are availablein the Hunt Group.

• When adding Hunt Group post site deployment,ensure that you create a group voicemail box first.Else, the drop-down list does not show "Route toGroup Voicemail Box" option.

• Route to Hunt Groups—the call is forward to another Hunt Group.Select the Hunt Group from the drop-down list.

• Route to Other—the call is forwarded to any other number, suchas extensions.

• Route to Voicemail Box—the call is forwarded to the voicemailbox of a user.

When No Member is Available

Timer Settings

Enter the maximum time for a member's phone to wait before passingthe call to the other member's phone. This happens only for longest-idle,sequential, and peer hunt methods. The range is from 3 to 60,000seconds.

Member Timeout (3-60000 Sec)

Enables call queueing.Enable Call Queuing

This field is visible only when Enable Call Queuing checkbox is checked.

Note

Set the frequency in which the pre-recorded voice message (comfortgreeting) is played while the callers wait in the queue. The range is from30 to 120 seconds.

Comfort Greeting frequency(30-120 Sec)

This field is visible only when Enable Call Queuing checkbox is checked.

Note

Enter the maximum time to wait when the queue is busy or full beforerouting the call to "When No Member is Available " destination. Therange is from 20 to 3600 seconds.

Max Waiting Time (20-3600 Sec)

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide144

Manage Your SiteHunt Groups - Field Descriptions

Page 155: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Save your hunt group configuration settings.Save

Add Users to Hunt Groups

Procedure

Step 1 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 2 Click Hunt Groups.Step 3 Click Modify from the Actions menu for the desired Hunt Group.Step 4 Add the extension associated with the users in Extension List field. Use commas to separate extensions.Step 5 Click Yes.

Night ServiceNight service allows you to transfer the incoming calls to a designated set of extensions during closed hours.During the night service hours (also known as closed hours), calls coming in to the designated extension,known as night service extensions, sends a special "burst" ring to night-service phones (phones that receivethe calls coming from the night service extension) that have been specified to receive the special ring. Phoneusers at the night-service phones can then answer the incoming calls for the night-service extensions.

You can configure only one night-service phone per night-service extension.Note

Example

Nancy is a receptionist with extension 1234 at ABC organization having business hours from 0900to 1700. When night service is configured, the calls received on extension 1234 between 17:00 and08:59 is transferred to extension 5678 that is designated to receive calls during closed hours.

Night Service Manual Activation CodeManual Activation Code allows a user to manually activate the night service mode on the phone.

Manual Activation Code must start with an asterisk (*) followed by a minimum of 3 digits. A maximum of15 digits can be configured excluding the asterisk (*). Default value for manual activation code is *1234.

Example

ABC organization has set the night service activation code as *1234. Business hours are fromMondayto Friday 09:00 to 17:00. If Nancy at the reception wants to log out for a couple of hours during the

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide145

Manage Your SiteAdd Users to Hunt Groups

Page 156: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

business hours, she can dial *1234 to trigger the night service mode on the phone. The incomingcalls to her extension are transferred to the designated night service phone when she is away. Whenshe is back, she can dial *1234 to log out of the night service mode and enter the business hoursmode to receive the incoming calls.

Configure Night ServiceTable 29: Configure Night Service—Task Flow

ReferencesPrerequisitePurposeTaskStep

Activate NightService, on page146

—Activate and enter theactive hours for NightService.

Activate NightService

Step 1

Designate anExtension for NightService Hours, onpage 147

—Configure theextension that youwant to designate asthe Night Servicephone.

Designate anExtension for NightService Hours

Step 2

Designate anExtension toReceive NightService Calls, onpage 147

—Configure theextension that youwant to designate toreceive Night Servicecalls.

Designate Extensionto Receive CallsDuring Night ServiceHours

Step 3

Activate Night Service

Procedure

Step 1 Click Actions corresponding to your site from the Dashboard.Step 2 Click Night Service under Manage Site.Step 3 Turn on the slider to enable Night Service.Step 4 (Optional) Enter the Manual Activation Code.

Manual Activation code is used to manually trigger night service mode during business hours.

Manual Activation Code must start with an asterisk (*) followed by a minimum of 3 digits. Amaximum of 15 digits can be configured excluding the asterisk (*). Default value for manualactivation code is *1234.

Note

Step 5 Enter the active hours for Night Service.

You cannot overlap the end time of Night Service and the opening time of the business hours. For example,if your business closes at 17:00 and opens next day at 09:00, enter the Night Service hours as 17:00 and 08:59.You cannot enter 09:00 as it overlaps with the open business hours. Night Service hours must be entered in24-hour time format.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide146

Manage Your SiteConfigure Night Service

Page 157: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 6 Add the business holidays when you want the Night Service to be active.Step 7 Click Yes to save the changes.

Designate an Extension for Night Service Hours

Procedure

Step 1 Click Actions corresponding to your site from the Dashboard.Step 2 Click Extensions under Manage Site.Step 3 Click Modify Extension from Actions column for the extension that you want to designate as Night Service

phone.Step 4 Enter the number to which calls must be forwarded during night service hours in the Night Service field on

Call Forward page.Step 5 Check the Night Service Bell check box on the Additional Settings page.

You must configure Night Service Bell for all the Night Service phones designated to receive NightService calls. The Night Service bell ensures that all the phones designated for Night Service receivethe burst ring. For more information, refer to Designate an Extension to Receive Night ServiceCalls, on page 147.

Note

Step 6 Click Yes to save the changes.

Designate an Extension to Receive Night Service Calls

Procedure

Step 1 Click Actions corresponding to your site from the Dashboard.Step 2 Click Extensions under Manage Site.Step 3 Click Modify Extension from Actions column for the extension that you want to designate to receive Night

Service calls.Step 4 Check the Night Service Bell check box on the Additional Settings page.Step 5 Click Yes to save the changes.

Pickup GroupPickup Group is a group of extensions, where the phone users can answer an incoming call on any of theextensions belonging to the same pickup group. By default, BE4000 creates 1 as the pickup group for all theextensions. You can change the pickup group based on your preference. You can assign only one pickupgroup per extension.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide147

Manage Your SiteDesignate an Extension for Night Service Hours

Page 158: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Create a Pickup Group

Before you begin

Have the list of extensions belonging to the pickup group ready

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Sites from the Actions menu for the desired site.Step 3 Click Modify Extension from the Actions menu for the desired Extension.Step 4 Navigate to the Additional Settings page.Step 5 Enter a number for the pickup group in the Pickup Group field.

Pickup Group number cannot overlap with any existing hunt group pilot number.Note

Step 6 Click Yes to save the changes.Step 7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 for all the extensions belonging to the group.

Answer a Pickup Group CallAnswer an Incoming Call from the Same Pickup Group

A phone user can answer an incoming call on any of the extensions belonging to the same pickup group inthe following ways:

• Press the Pickup softkey

• Press the GPickup softkey followed by *

Answer an Incoming Call from a different Pickup Group

A phone user can answer an incoming call on any of the extensions belonging to different pickup groups bypressing the GPickup softkey followed by pickup group number.

If Pickup Call check box is enabled for an extension in the BE4000 Portal (Refer Enable "Pickup Call" CheckBox for an Extension, on page 149), the phone user can answer an incoming call in any of the pickup groupsby pressing GPickup softkey followed *.

Example

Pickup Group 2—Extensions 4501, 4502, and 4503

Pickup Group 3—Extensions 4504, 4505, and 4506

Default Pickup Group 1—Extensions 4507 and 4508

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide148

Manage Your SiteCreate a Pickup Group

Page 159: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Table 30: Answering a Pickup Group Call

PressCall Answered ByIncoming Call OnPickup Call check box

• Pickup softkey

• GPickup softkeyfollowed by *

4502 or 4503 (anyextension in the samegroup)

4501 (Pickup Group 2)Disabled

GPickup softkeyfollowed by 2 (PickupGroup number)

4504 (any extension in adifferent Pickup Group)

4501 (Pickup Group 2)Disabled

GPickup softkeyfollowed by *

45074501 (Pickup Group 2)Enabled for 4507

45074504 (Pickup Group 3)

Enable "Pickup Call" Check Box for an ExtensionYou can configure an extension to answer an incoming call on an extension belonging to any other group bypressing GPickup softkey followed by *. Enabling Pickup Call check box eliminates the need for pressingpickup group number while answering the call.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Sites from the Actions menu for the desired site.Step 3 Click Modify Extension from the Actions menu for the desired Extension.Step 4 Navigate to the Additional Settings page.Step 5 Check the Pickup Call check box.Step 6 Click Yes to save the changes.

Call ParkThe Call Park feature allows you to put a call on hold, so it can be retrieved from another phone.

For example, a customer calls a retail store and asks for the sporting goods department. The operator whoanswers the call, transfers the call to one of the extensions that is associated with the sporting goods departmentand informs them to retrieve the call. Any phone in the sporting goods department can answer the call byretrieving the parked call.

Only End Users can park and retrieve the calls.

For details on how to park and retrieve a call, see End-User Guides.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide149

Manage Your SiteEnable "Pickup Call" Check Box for an Extension

Page 160: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

PagingPaging provides one-way voice path to the phones that have been designated to receive paging. The pagedphone automatically answers the page in speakerphone mode with “Mute” activated.

By default, the BE4000 system creates a "PageAll" group that consists of all phones available in the site.

For details on how to send a page, see End-User Guides.

Whisper PagingWhen the paged phone is busy with a connected call, the user of the paged phone can hear both the activeconversation and the paging message. This is called Whisper paging.

Whisper paging is enabled on all phones by default and cannot be disabled.Note

Paging GroupYou can create paging groups with the desired set of phones and designate a specific number to relay audiomessages. The number that is specified to relay audio messages is called as the Pilot Number.

When a caller dials the pilot number, each phone available in the paging group automatically answers thepage in speaker mode. There is no need to press any button on the phone to answer the page.

The paged phone can receive the page when it is idle or busy on an active call. When the phone is busy onan active call, the user of the paged phone can hear both the conversation of the active call and the whisperpage at a time.

By default, the BE4000 system creates the "PageAll" group consisting of all phones available in the site. Toadd members to the newly created paging group, you must first remove the members from "PageAll" groupor any other paging group where the phone is already a member.

When a new paging group is created, by default, it is not part of the "PageAll" group. You can choose to addit to the "PageAll" group or to exclude.

• A phone can be part of only one paging group, including the "PageAll" group.

• You can add a maximum of 10 paging groups, including the "PageAll" group.

• A paging group cannot contain other paging groups in it. Only "PageAll" group can contain other paginggroups in it.

Note

When paging an extension that is shared on two phones (shared line), each phone on the shared line is treatedseparately. A phone that can be paged by two paging groups receives the page from the first paging groupand ignores the page from the second paging group.When the page from the first paging group is disconnected,the phone can receive the page from the second paging group.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide150

Manage Your SitePaging

Page 161: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Paging is not considered a call and hence, a paging phone that is in a connected state can press another lineto make a call using the phone’s softkeys.

A Cisco Partner can create paging groups during the initial site deployment. A Cisco Partner and the customeradministrator can create or modify the paging group post site deployment.

Paging is not supported on Cisco Unified IP Conference Phone 8831 and Cisco ATA 190 Analog TelephoneAdapter.

Note

Add a Paging Group

Before you begin

Ensure that you have the list of extensions that you want in the paging group.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site > Paging.Step 3 Click Add New Paging Group.Step 4 Enter the information in the fields. For descriptions of the fields, see Paging—Field Descriptions, on page

151.Step 5 Click Save.

Paging—Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Name of the paging group. Enter a minimum of 2 anda maximum of 30 characters.

Only 0-9 a-z A-Z !#%,-./=_? are allowed.Note

Group Name

Number that is designated to relay audio pages. PilotNumber must contain same number of digits as thatof the extension length.

The first digit cannot be the same as thedigit used for dialing an outside line,sending a call to voicemail automatically,and dialing an intercom extension.

Note

Pilot Number

List of members in the paging group. Search for themembers using the username or extension. You canalso search for the members using the "ShowDirectory" option.

Add Members

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide151

Manage Your SiteAdd a Paging Group

Page 162: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Creates a paging group or saves the changes that aremade to an existing paging group.

Save

Modify a Paging Group

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site > Paging.Step 3 Click Edit from "Action" column, corresponding to the paging group that you want to modify.Step 4 Modify the details of the paging group as required. For description of the fields, see Paging—Field Descriptions,

on page 151.Step 5 Click Save.

Delete a Paging Group

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site > Paging.Step 3 Click Delete from "Action" column, corresponding to the paging group that you want to modify.Step 4 Click Yes.

IntercomAn intercom call is a dedicated two-way audio path between two intercom lines. BE4000 supports intercomfunctionality for one-way and press-to-answer voice connections using a dedicated pair of intercom directorynumbers on two phones.

BE4000 creates an intercom line for all the extensions by default. A digit is configured as intercom prefix bythe Cisco partner while configuring the BE4000 site. You can place an intercom call by dialing the intercomprefix and the extension. When an intercom call is placed, one-way audio is established. Once the callednumber answers the intercom call by pressing the line key, the call becomes two-way audio.

When an intercom line is deleted, you can add it back using the Type drop-down list under Manage Site >Phones > Modify Phone > Buttons page.

You can add only the primary extension as an intercom line.Note

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide152

Manage Your SiteModify a Paging Group

Page 163: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

For details on how to place an intercom call, see End-User Guides.

Call Detail RecordsBE4000 allows you to generate the call detail records (CDR) reports after the site is successfully deployed.The CDR report is generated based on the successful incoming and outgoing external calls that are made percustomer site for a specific date range. The report includes details such as the calling and called numbers,location, time, and duration of each call.

• You cannot configure CDR during initial site deployment.

• The calls that are made within the organization is not captured in the CDR reports.

Note

You can generate the following types of reports:

• Call History

• Busy Hours

• Concurrent Calls

You can download a local copy of the Call History CDR reports.

Currently, all CDR reports are retained indefinitely, unless CDR collection is disabled. However, the CDRreport retention period is subjected to change in the future.

If CDR collection is disabled, all previously collected call detail records get deleted and cannot be recovered.Note

Enable Collection of Call Detail Records

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Reports > CDR Collection.Step 4 Turn on Collect Call Detail Records.Step 5 (Optional) Click Add Row and enter the desired numbers in the Dialed Number(s) column. When a user in

the BE4000 system dials the number(s) that are entered here, an email notification is triggered.Step 6 (Optional) Click Add Row and enter the email address(es) in the Email address(es) column. The email

address that is entered here receives the notification when a user dials the numbers that are specified underDialed Number(s) column.

Step 7 Click Save.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide153

Manage Your SiteCall Detail Records

Page 164: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

View Call History ReportCall History CDR report contains the details of all successful incoming and outgoing external calls that aremade per site for a specific date range. The call history report includes the following details:

• Date and Time of the call

• Site Name

• Calling Number

• Called Number

• Duration of the Call

• Reason for Call Disconnect

• Trunk type

Before you begin

Ensure that the CDR Collection is enabled for the required site. For more details, see Enable Collection ofCall Detail Records , on page 153.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Reports > Call Detail Records. The Manage Express Reports page is launched in a new tab.Step 4 Choose a location from the Location drop-down list.Step 5 Choose Call History from Call History drop-down list.Step 6 Select the required date range. The report is displayed on the screen.Step 7 View the call history details. You can also perform a search based on the calling and called numbers.

What to do next

(Optional) Download Call History Report .

Download Call History ReportCall History CDR report contains the details of all successful incoming and outgoing external calls that aremade per site for a specific date range. The call history report includes the following details:

• Date and Time of the call

• Site Name

• Calling Number

• Called Number

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide154

Manage Your SiteView Call History Report

Page 165: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• Duration of the Call

• Reason for Call Disconnect

• Trunk type

Before you begin

Ensure that the CDR Collection is enabled for the required site. For more details, see Enable Collection ofCall Detail Records , on page 153.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Reports > Call Detail Records. The Manage Express Reports page is launched in a new tab.Step 4 Choose a location from the Location drop-down list.Step 5 Choose Call History from Call History drop-down list.Step 6 Select the required date range. The report is displayed on the screen.Step 7 View the call history details. You can also perform a search based on the calling and called numbers.Step 8 Click Export. Wait for a few seconds until the report is downloaded. Close the Export screen by clicking X

below your username.

View Busy Hours ReportBusy hours report provides you the total number of incoming and outgoing external calls that are made perday. The report contains the day or hour during which the calls are made, the total number of calls, and theaverage duration per call. The busy hours report also provides a graphical representation of the generateddata.

Before you begin

Ensure that the CDR Collection is enabled for the required site. For more details, see Enable Collection ofCall Detail Records , on page 153.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Reports > Call Detail Records. The Manage Express Reports page is launched in a new tab.Step 4 Choose a location from the Location drop-down list.Step 5 Choose Busy Hours from the Voice drop-down list.Step 6 Select the required date range. The report is displayed on the screen.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide155

Manage Your SiteView Busy Hours Report

Page 166: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 7 View the busy hours CDR report. Hover the mouse pointer over the graph to view the total number of calls,Peak Hour, and Peak Value.

Step 8 (Optional) Click the graph to view the total number of calls that are made for day on an hourly basis.

View the Concurrent Calls ReportConcurrent calls CDR report provides the details of the number of internal and external outgoing calls thatare active at the same time on an hourly basis. The report also contains the peak time and the total number ofactive calls during the peak time.

Before you begin

Ensure that the CDR Collection is enabled for the required site. For more details, see Enable Collection ofCall Detail Records , on page 153.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Reports > Call Detail Records. The Manage Express Reports page is launched in a new tab.Step 4 Choose a location from the Location drop-down list.Step 5 Choose Concurrent Calls from the Voice drop-down list.Step 6 Select the required date range. The report is displayed on the screen.Step 7 View the concurrent calls CDR report.Step 8 (Optional) Click Grid View to view the number of concurrent calls on an hourly basis, peak time, and peak

count.

View Operator ReportThe Operator report contains the details of all call-related statistics including call queueing statistics, agentstatistics, and service level statistics. The reports are recorded at an operator level for a specific date range.The Operator report is updated daily once. The Operator report includes the following details:

• Agent Activity–Provides information on the Calls Answered by agents per site.

• Agent Statistics—Provides information on call-related statistics:

• Site Name

• Start Time

• End Time

• Total Calls Ans (From Queue)

• Avg Time in Call (From Queue)

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide156

Manage Your SiteView the Concurrent Calls Report

Page 167: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• Longest Time in Call (From Queue)

• Call Queueing—Provides information on the call queue:

• Date/Time

• To Queue

• Answered

• Avg Ans Time

• Long Ans Time

• Abandoned

• Average Abandon Time

• Details

• Queue Statistics—Provides information on call-queue related statistics:

• Site Name

• Start Time

• End Time

• Max Agents

• Min Agents

• Avg Time in Call (secs)

• Longest Time in Call (secs)

• Service Level—For more information on the Service Level report, see Service Level Report, on page158.

Before you begin

Ensure that the CDR Collection is enabled for the required site. For more details, see Enable Collection ofCall Detail Records , on page 153.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Reports > Call Detail Records. The Manage Express Reports page is launched in a new tab.Step 4 Choose the required report type from Operator drop-down list.Step 5 Select the required date range. The report is displayed on the screen.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide157

Manage Your SiteView Operator Report

Page 168: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Service Level ReportService Level report is an interactive graphical representation of call waiting period and abandoned calls.Service Level report has two modes:

• Grouped

• Stacked

All the call waiting ranges are enabled by default and appears in the graph. You can turn off a call waitingrange by clicking on the legend definition. The statistics related to that call waiting period is not displayed onthe graph.

Note

Click the graph for a tabular representation of the generated data, including:

• Day

• Calls Waited Less Than 12 s

• Calls Waited Btwn 12–24 s

• Calls Waited Btwn 25–36 s

• Calls Waited Btwn 37–60 s

• Calls Waited More Than 60 s

• Calls Abdnd Less Than 12

• Calls Abdnd Btwn 12–24 s

• Calls Abdnd Btwn 25–36 s

• Calls Abdnd Btwn 37–60 s

• Calls Abdnd After 60 s

Disable Collection of Call Detail Records

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Reports > CDR Collection.Step 4 Turn off Collect Call Detail Records.Step 5 Click Save.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide158

Manage Your SiteService Level Report

Page 169: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Emergency AlertingBE4000 allows you tomonitor the calls that are made fromwithin the organization to specific external numbers,such as (911). You can enter the numbers to monitor and the email address to receive the notification whenthe specified numbers are dialed.

Add a Number for Emergency Alert Notification

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Reports > CDR Collection.Step 4 Turn on Collect Call Detail Records.Step 5 Click Add Row and enter the desired numbers under Dialed Number(s). When a user in the BE4000 system

dials the number(s) entered here, an email is triggered.Step 6 Enter the Add Row and enter the email address(es) in under Email address(es). The email address entered

here receives a notification when a user dials the numbers specified under Dialed Number(s).Step 7 Click Save.

Remove a Number from Emergency Alert Notification

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Reports > CDR Collection.Step 4 Turn on Collect Call Detail Records.Step 5 Click Delete corresponding to the required number under Emergency Alerting section.Step 6 Click Save.

Task LogYou can view the history of all the tasks that are performed on a BE4000 site in the past 62 days.

By default, the portal shows the tasks that are performed from 12AM on the current date. You can select thepreferred date range from the calender available at the top right corner of the page. The options available forselecting the date range are:

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide159

Manage Your SiteEmergency Alerting

Page 170: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• Today—Tasks that are performed from 12AM on the current date.

• Yesterday—Tasks that were performed yesterday.

• Last 7 Days—Task that were performed in the past 7 days.

• Last 30 Days—Tasks that were performed in the past 30 days.

• This Month—Tasks that were performed from the first of the current month until the current date.

• Custom Range—Choose start date and end date from the calender and click "Apply". If you want toselect a single date (as both start and end date), double-click the date and click "Apply".

The task log provides the following details:

• Task Name—Name of the task.

• Username—User who performed the task.

• Start Time—Time when the task started.

• Last Updated Time—Time when the task ended.

• Status—Result of the task.

• Action—View trace file for the task.

You can view the trace file of each task. Trace file helps in troubleshooting the issues with the task performed.You can also get the trace file sent to your preferred email address.

• Task Log is enabled by default and cannot be disabled.

• Task Log contains the list of tasks that are performed only after the initial site deployment.

Note

View Task Log

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from "Actions" column corresponding to the desired site.Step 3 Click Reports > Task Log.Step 4 Select the duration for which you want to view the task log. You can choose one of the following options:

• Today—Tasks that are performed from 12AM on the current date.

• Yesterday—Tasks that were performed yesterday.

• Last 7 Days—Task that were performed in the past 7 days.

• Last 30 Days—Tasks that were performed in the past 30 days.

• This Month—Tasks that were performed from the first of the current month until the current date.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide160

Manage Your SiteView Task Log

Page 171: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• Custom Range—Choose start date and end date from the calender and click "Apply". If you want toselect a single date (as both start and end date), double-click the date and click "Apply".

Step 5 View the task log displayed on the screen. You can filter the log based on "Task Name" or "Username".Step 6 (Optional) Click View Trace from the "Actions" column corresponding to the task and view the trace file.

You can also get the trace file of the task sent to your email address.

Cisco ATA Analog Telephone AdaptersCisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapters are the handset-to-Ethernet adapters that enable you to turn analogdevices, such as phones, fax machines, into IP devices. The Cisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapter supportstwo voice ports, each with an independent phone number and has an RJ-45 10/100BASE-T data port.

• Cisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapters can be added only post site deployment. You cannot add duringinitial site deployment.

• Cisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapter can be added only under Manage Site > Phones. You cannotadd Cisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapter under Manage Site > Extensions and Manage Site > UserManagement.

• A fax call does not fall back to voice only call after the fax is sent.

• The following features are not supported:

• Paging

• Single Number Reach (SNR)

• Speed dial

Note

Configure Cisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapter

Before you begin

Ensure that you have:

• Added an extension that is freely available for provisioning.While adding an extension, you do not selectany phone type. For detailed information on adding an extension, see Add an Extension , on page 108.

• Added Cisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapter in the BE4000 portal. For detailed information on, seeAdd a New Phone , on page 118.

• Phone devices ready

• TFTP Address

• IP Address and subnet mask for Cisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapter

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide161

Manage Your SiteCisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapters

Page 172: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the phones to Line 1 and Line 2.Step 2 Access Interactive Voice Response (IVR).

a) Go off hook on the phone and press ****. The IVR prompts for passwordb) Enter the default password, 24726 followed by #.

The Cisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapter allows you to enter only numerical values for thepassword.

Note

Step 3 Set the static IP mode.a) Press 101 followed by # to enter the LAN configuration mode.b) Press 1 followed by # to set the static IP mode.c) Press 1 to save the changes.

After setting the IP mode to static IP, you must go on-hook to configure the IP address, subnet mask,and default gateway. To set static IP, network cable must be connected.

Note

Step 4 Configure the IP Address.a) Press 111 followed by # to enter the IP address configuration mode.b) Enter the IP address followed by #. Enter “*” for in place of “.” while entering the IP address. For example,

if your IP address is 198.51.100.20, enter 198*51*100*20#.c) Press 1 to save the changes.

Step 5 Configure the subnet mask.a) Press 121 followed by # to enter the subnet configuration mode.b) Enter the subnet mask followed by #. Enter “*” for in place of “.” while entering the subnet mask. For

example, if your IP address is 255.255.0.0, enter 255*255*0*0#.c) Press 1 to save the changes.

Step 6 Configure the default gateway.a) Press 131 followed by # to enter the default gateway configuration mode.b) Enter the default gateway followed by #. Enter “*” for in place of “.” while entering the subnet mask.

For example, if your default gateway address is 198.51.100.1, enter 198*51*100*1#.c) Press 1 to save the changes.

Step 7 Configure the TFTP address.a) Press 221 followed by # to enter the TFTP configuration mode.b) Enter the TFTP address followed by #. Enter “*” for in place of “.” while entering the subnet mask. For

example, if your TFTP address is 203.0.113.20, enter 203*0*113*20#.c) Press 1 to save the changes.

Step 8 Restart Cisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapter by unplugging and re-plugging the Ethernet cable from phoneto the Cisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapter.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide162

Manage Your SiteConfigure Cisco ATA Analog Telephone Adapter

Page 173: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Direct Inward Dial NumbersDirect Inward Dial (DID) numbers are the registered numbers that you get from your service provider. ACisco partner can add the DID numbers during initial site deployment in the Setup Assistant. A customeradministrator and Cisco partners can add, edit, or delete the DID numbers post-site deployment. DID numbershould be entered in the national number format. You can add Direct Inward Dial (DID) numbers for yourSIP, BRI, and PRI connections.

Do not add FXO line numbers while adding DID numbers as FXO line numbers can be added when line cardsare added.

Note

Inbound Call Mapping

BE4000 allows you to map the incoming calls of a DID number to one of the following:

• Auto Attendant—You can map the incoming calls on the DID number to the Auto Attendant. The AutoAttendant menu options is played when the callers dial the DID number. You choose one of the followingas the target number:

• Auto Attendant Pilot Number—Choose pilot number of the Auto Attendant.

• Greeting Admin—You can assign a Direct Inward Dial (DID) number as the number to log in theAuto Attendant Alternate admin settings. The customer administrator (or an end user with"PromptAdministrators" privileges), can dial the DID number instead of 70397 to reach the AutoAttendant admin settings on the phone.

• Extension—You can select any one of the existing extensions. The incoming calls on the DID numberring on the specified extension.

• Hunt Group—You can map the incoming calls on the DID number to an existing hunt group. Theincoming calls on the DID numbers ring on the extensions belonging to the specified hunt group.

• Meet Me—You can map the incoming calls on the DID number to a Meet Me conference number. Theincoming calls on the DID numbers ring on the Meet Me conference numbers that you configure.

If you disable hardware conference, BE4000 reverts to the default option of Built-In Bridge conference. Also,the mapping of incoming calls on the DID number to a Meet Me conference number is reset. Hence, theincoming calls on the DID number is directed to the default target. The default Select option is displayedagainst the DID number in the BE4000 portal.

Note

You can also set a default target for all the DID numbers belonging to a service provider. The default targetcan be auto attendant, extension, or hunt group. If there are any DID numbers that are not mapped to autoattendant, extension, or hunt group, the call is directed to the default target set for the service provider.

Outbound Caller ID

BE4000 allows you to configure a specific DID number to be displayed on the called phone when an outboundcall is placed from an extension within the organization.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide163

Manage Your SiteDirect Inward Dial Numbers

Page 174: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

You can also set a default outbound DID number for a service provider. In such a case, an extension withouta specified DID number displays the default outbound DID number configured for the service provider.

The format of the number inOutbound Caller ID need not be same as the Direct Inward Dial numbers (DID)in Inbound Call Mapping. Based on requirements, you can configure the incoming DID and outboundnumber to different formats. For example, consider a scenario where area code is prefixed to your inboundDID number (1168117777). However, your preferred outbound call format does not include the area code.Then, BE4000 portal allows you to edit the format of the outbound number to 68117777. Check the checkbox Outbound Caller IDs do not match Direct Inward Dial numbers underManage Site>Direct InwardDial Numbers>Outbound Caller ID.

Custom Outbound Call ID

You can define the name that appears as caller ID for outbound calls made through the SIP trunk. BE4000portal allows you to enter the outbound caller ID name in the field Custom Outbound Caller ID. The fieldis available under Manage Site>Direct Inward Dial Numbers>Outbound Caller ID. Custom OutboundCaller ID is an optional field. If you leave the field blank, the default caller ID is used.

Example

ABC organization has 12345 and 67890 as DID numbers from service provider XYZ. The defaultoutbound DID number set for XYZ service provider is 12345. ABC organization has two extensions4501 and 4502. Extension 4501 is mapped to 67890 as Outbound DID. Extension 4502 is mappedto default outbound DID.

When an outbound call is placed from extension 4501, the called phone displays the incoming callnumber as 67890 without revealing the extension number within the organization ABC.

When a call is placed from extension 4502, the called phone displays the incoming call number as12345 which is the default outbound DID number set for the service provider XYZ.

Manage DID Numbers

Before you begin

• Ensure that you have the new DID numbers to be added, or the changes to be made to the existing DIDnumbers ready

• Ensure that you have the inbound call mapping and outbound caller ID display preference ready

Procedure

Step 1 Click Actions corresponding to your site from the Dashboard.Step 2 Click Direct Inward Dial Numbers under Manage Site.Step 3 Add, modify, or delete the DID numbers on the Manage Numbers page.

The DID numbers set on the Direct Dial Number page under Call Routing in the Setup Assistant areauto-populated on this page.

Step 4 Choose a default target for each service provider from the Default Target drop-down list on the InboundCall Mapping page. Based on your preference, choose a target type (auto attendant, extension, or hunt group)

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide164

Manage Your SiteManage DID Numbers

Page 175: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

for each registered number from Target Type drop-down and choose a corresponding target number fromTarget Number drop-down list.

Step 5 Choose a default outbound DID for each service provider from the Default Outbound DID drop-down liston the Outbound Caller ID page. Based on your preference, choose a DID number as Caller ID for eachextension from the Caller ID drop-down list.

Step 6 Click Yes to save the changes.

Inbound Call BlockingInbound call blocking helps you in blocking calls from telemarketers. A Cisco Partner or CustomerAdministrator can add a list of numbers from which the calls are blocked. When an incoming call is receivedfrom such numbers, the call gets disconnected immediately.

You can add numbers to inbound call blocking list only after the initial deployment.Note

Add Numbers to Inbound Call Blocking List

Before you begin

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from "Actions" menu on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Inbound Call Blocking.Step 4 Click Add Row.Step 5 Enter the number.

• You can add a minimum of 3 digits and a maximum of 32 digits.

• You can add a maximum of xx numbers.

• Do not include international or national access digits when adding numbers. Following are acouple of examples:

• US Domestic—5105551234 (no leading 1)

• US International—441234567890 (no leading 011)

• UK Domestic—1234567890 (no leading 0)

• UK International—15105551234 (no leading 00)

Note

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide165

Manage Your SiteInbound Call Blocking

Page 176: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Modify Music on HoldBy default, the standard audio file is played during call hold. You may replace the standard audio file byuploading your own custom audio file.

Procedure

Step 1 Click Actions corresponding to your site from the Dashboard.Step 2 Click Music on Hold under Manage Site.Step 3 Click Upload.

BE4000 supports only .au and .wav audio file with G.711; ITU-T a-law or u-law, 8kHz, 8 bit, Monoformat. The file cannot be larger than 1 MB (about 2 minutes). The filename cannot have space andspecial characters.

Note

Step 4 Click the arrow at the bottom of the screen and click Yes to save.

Specify Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule allows you to designate a two hour block of time each day when it is safe for the systemto install software updates. The system may be offline and unable to make or receive phone calls during themaintenance schedule.

Before you begin

• Customer site is successfully deployed and available Online.

Procedure

Step 1 Click Manage Site from "Actions "menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 2 Click Settings > Maintenance Schedule.Step 3 Enter the Maintenance Schedule Beginning time for each day of the week.

The two hour duration of maintenance schedule is auto adjusted in the Ending field based on thevalue you entered in the Beginning field.

Note

Step 4 Click Save.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide166

Manage Your SiteModify Music on Hold

Page 177: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Configure Voicemail to EmailBE4000 provides you the “Voicemail to Email” functionality, wherein the voicemail that is received by yourextension is sent as an email attachment to your registered email address. To enable this feature, you mustconfigure the SMTP server in the BE4000 portal.

To enable the voicemail to email functionality, configure the IP address or the domain name of SMTP server.You can set the “From” address for sending emails containing voicemail as an email attachment. Ensure thatthe SMTP server allows receiving emails from the set email address.

You can configure Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of public SMTP servers only. BE4000 handles allDomain Name System (DNS) resolutions through the internet and thus only public FQDNs are accepted. Forexample, smtp.office365.com, smtp.gmail.com.

Note

You can make the voicemail to email functionality secure by entering a username and password.

The authenticate username and password are the credentials required by the voicemail application to authenticateitself with the SMTP relay server before sending the voicemail file.

You can upload custom SMTP server certificates after the initial site deployment under Manage Site >Settings > System Settings.

• The "Upload SMTP Server Certificate" section is visible only when you choose "SSL" or "STARTTLS"from the Security drop-down list.

• BE4000 accepts SMTP server certificates only in .crt file format.

Note

After the site is deployed, you can update SMTP server address. You can also validate the SMTP serveraddress before configuring. An email address must be entered for receiving the voicemail as email. Ensurethat the SMTP server allows receiving emails from the entered email address. If the SMTP server address isvalid, you see the success message displayed on the portal and an email sent to the configured email address.

• Before validating the SMTP server address, the portal saves the changes made to the SMTP server settingsand the previously configured settings cannot be restored.

• The portal only checks if the SMTP server address is valid and does not check the validity of the emailaddress entered. You see success message displayed on the portal based on the voicemail application'sability to authenticate and send email using the SMTP Relay. If the email address entered is invalid, youmay not receive the email. Hence, you may see the success message on the portal even when you havenot received the email.

Note

The following are the two options to configure the voicemail to email functionality:

• If the SMTP server is Office 365, follow the steps provided in Configure Office 365, on page 168

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide167

Manage Your SiteConfigure Voicemail to Email

Page 178: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• If the customer has their own SMTP relay (other than Office 365), ensure that the proprietary certificateof the SMTP relay is trusted by BE4000. If the proprietary certificates are trusted by the BE4000, followthe steps provided in Add SMTP Server Details , on page 174

Configure Office 365Table 31: Office 365 Configuration—Task Flow

ReferenceTaskStep

Configure a Connector, on page 168Configure a Connector from your organizationalserver to the Office 365

1

Add a domain and users to Office 365, on page173

Add a domain to Office 3652

Fetch MX FQDN Record, on page 174Fetch MX FQDN Record3

Add SMTP Server Details , on page 174Add SMTP Server details in the BE4000 Portal4

Configure a Connector

Before you begin

You should have admin privileges

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to Office 365 portal.Step 2 Click Admin from the dashboard. The Admin Centre page is displayed.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide168

Manage Your SiteConfigure Office 365

Page 179: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Figure 10: Office 365 Dashboard

Step 3 Click Admin Centers > Exchange. The Exchange admin center page is displayed.

Figure 11: Admin Center

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide169

Manage Your SiteConfigure a Connector

Page 180: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 4 Clickmail flow > Connectors on the Office 365 portal. Click + to add a new connector. Choose the followingfor From and To fields and click Next.

• From: Your organization’s email server

• To: Office 365

Figure 12: Exchange Admin Center

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide170

Manage Your SiteConfigure a Connector

Page 181: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Figure 13: New Connector

Step 5 Provide a name for the connector and click Next.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide171

Manage Your SiteConfigure a Connector

Page 182: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Figure 14: Name for the Connector

Step 6 Click By verifying that the IP address of the sending server matches one of these IP addresses thatbelong to your organization and provide the public IP used for SMTP. Public IP used for SMTP can be gotby checking with http://whatsmyip.com.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide172

Manage Your SiteConfigure a Connector

Page 183: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Figure 15: IP Address for Connector

Step 7 Click Next. Verify the settings and click Save.

Add a domain and users to Office 365

Procedure

Log in to Office 365 portal and add a domain and users. For more information, refer Add a domain and users.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide173

Manage Your SiteAdd a domain and users to Office 365

Page 184: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Fetch MX FQDN Record

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to Office 365 portal.Step 2 Click Setup > Domains.Step 3 Copy and save the MX Record value from the “Exchange Online” section. For example, MX Record looks

like contoso-com.mail.protection.outlook.com.

Figure 16: MX Record

Add SMTP Server Details

Before you begin

• For Office 365, have the MX FQDN Record ready. Refer Fetch MX FQDN Record, on page 174

• For SMTP Relay other than Office 365, have the SMTP server IP address or domain name ready

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal—https://be4000.cisco.com.Step 2 Click Add Customer from the dashboard and start the Setup Assistant.Step 3 Enter the required details on the initial pages and navigate to LAN Connection page.Step 4 Enter the SMTP server details under “SMTP Server – Enables Voicemail to Email Functionality” section.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide174

Manage Your SiteFetch MX FQDN Record

Page 185: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

a) In the “IP Address or Domain Name” field, enter one of the following:

You can configure Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of public SMTP servers only. BE4000handles all Domain Name System (DNS) resolutions through the internet and thus only publicFQDNs are accepted. For example, smtp.office365.com, smtp.gmail.com.

Note

• If the customer has Office 365, enter the MX FQDN record that is copied from Office 365 portal.

• If the customer has SMTP relay other than Office 365, enter the SMTP server IP Address or DomainName.

b) In the “Port” field, enter one of the following:

• If the "Security Mode" is "None, enter 25

• If the "Security Mode" is "SSL", enter 465

• If the "Security Mode" is "STARTTLS", enter 587

c) From the “Security Mode” drop-down list, enter one of the following:

• If the customer has Office 365, choose None. "SSL" and "STARTTLS" are not supported for Office365.

• If the customer has SMTP relay that is trusted by the BE4000, choose SSL or STARTTLS as percustomer’s network.

d) In the "Sender's Email Address", enter the email address that is used as "From" address while sending theemails containing the voicemail attachments.

e) (Optional) Check the Authenticate check box and enter the username and password.

The authenticate username and password are the credentials required by the voicemail application toauthenticate itself with the SMTP relay server before sending the voicemail file.

Step 5 Enter the details in rest of the pages and click Yes to apply the configuration.

What to do next

Deploy the BE4000 appliance. Refer Deploy a Customer Site for detailed steps.

Modify SMTP Server Details

Before you begin

• For Office 365, have the MX FQDN Record ready.

• For SMTP Relay other than Office 365, have the SMTP server IP address or domain name ready.

• If you are configuring a custom SMTP server certificate, ensure that you have the certificate in .crt fileformat.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide175

Manage Your SiteModify SMTP Server Details

Page 186: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Settings > System Settings.

Step 4 Enter the SMTP server details under “SMTP Server – Enables Voicemail to Email Functionality” section.a) In the “IP Address or Domain Name” field, enter one of the following:

You can configure Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of public SMTP servers only. BE4000handles all Domain Name System (DNS) resolutions through the internet and thus only publicFQDNs are accepted. For example, smtp.office365.com, smtp.gmail.com.

Note

• If the customer has Office 365, enter the MX FQDN record that is copied from Office 365 portal.

• If the customer has SMTP relay other than Office 365, enter the SMTP server IP Address or DomainName.

b) In the “Port” field, enter one of the following:

• If the "Security Mode" is "None, enter 25

• If the "Security Mode" is "SSL", enter 465

• If the "Security Mode" is "STARTTLS", enter 587

c) From the “Security Mode” drop-down list, enter one of the following:

• If the customer has Office 365, choose None. "SSL" and "STARTTLS" are not supported for Office365.

• If the customer has SMTP relay that is trusted by the BE4000, choose SSL or STARTTLS as percustomer’s network.

d) In the "Sender's Email Address", enter the email address that is used as "From" address while sending theemails containing the voicemail attachments.

e) Click Choose File in the "Upload SMTP Server Certificate" section to upload the certificate.

• The "Upload SMTP Server Certificate" section is visible only when you choose "SSL" or"STARTTLS" from the Security drop-down list.

• BE4000 accepts SMTP server certificates only in .crt file format.

Note

f) (Optional) Check the Authenticate check box and enter the username and password.

The authenticate username and password are the credentials required by the voicemail application toauthenticate itself with the SMTP relay server before sending the voicemail file.

g) (Optional) ClickValidate SMTP. Enter the email address to receive the test email containing the voicemail.Click Save & Send.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide176

Manage Your SiteModify SMTP Server Details

Page 187: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• Before validating the SMTP server address, the portal saves the changes made to the SMTPserver settings and the previously configured settings cannot be restored.

• The portal only checks if the SMTP server address is valid and does not check the validityof the email address entered. You see success message displayed on the portal based onthe voicemail application's ability to authenticate and send email using the SMTP Relay.If the email address entered is invalid, you may not receive the email. Hence, you may seethe success message on the portal even when you have not received the email.

Note

Step 5 Click Save.

Modify the Digit to Send Calls to Voicemail AutomaticallyProcedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Settings > System Settings.Step 4 Enter a digit between 1 to 6 in the Send to voicemail automatically field.Step 5 Click Save.

Modify the Digit to Dial an Outside LineBefore you begin

Ensure that you have a digit freely available and is not assigned as a prefix for making intercom calls andsending calls to voicemail automatically. Also, the digit is not the starting digit of Hunt Group pilot number,Auto Attendant Pilot Number, and Paging Group Pilot Number.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site corresponding to the desired site.Step 3 Click Settings > System Settings.Step 4 Choose a digit from the Dial an Outside Line drop-down list.Step 5 Click Save.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide177

Manage Your SiteModify the Digit to Send Calls to Voicemail Automatically

Page 188: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Modify Time ZoneAfter the initial site deployment, you can modify the time zone to which your BE4000 belongs.

Before you begin

Ensure that:

• BE4000 site is in the Online state.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Settings > System Settings.Step 4 Choose the time zone from the Time Zone drop-down list under Region Settings.

Changing the time zone reboots the Auto Attendant and Voicemail services and therefore will be unavailablefor up to 3 minutes.

Step 5 Click Save.

Smart LicenseBE4000 mandates its customers to update their smart license token in the cloud portal. You can get the smartlicense token from the Cisco Smart Software License (CSSM) portal. For more information on getting thesmart license token from CSSM, see Smart Licensing Guide.

Adding smart license token is optional during the initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant). If you don’thave smart license token during the initial deployment, BE4000 enters the evaluation mode. You can configurethe BE4000 in the evaluation mode for 90 days. Before the evaluation period is completed, enter the smartlicense token in the BE4000 cloud portal.

Cisco Partners and Customer Administrators can view the status of the smart license account and also updatethe smart license token under Manage Site > Settings > Licensing. The Smart Account field displays ifyour BE4000 site is in Registered or Unregistered state. Also, you can view the correspondingLicense Statusfor the Smart Account status. Click Refresh Status to get the latest license status of your site. For moreinformation, see Table 32: Smart License Account Status, on page 178.

The following table shows the various registration statuses and its associated description:

Table 32: Smart License Account Status

DescriptionLicense StatusSmart Account Status

You have valid license.AuthorizedRegistered

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide178

Manage Your SiteModify Time Zone

Page 189: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionLicense StatusSmart Account Status

You’re using more number oflicenses than purchased.

Out of ComplianceRegistered

After you are registered andauthorized, BE4000 automaticallyrenews the authorization for every30 days. If the BE4000 is unable toreach the CSSM for 90 days, thenyou see "Authorization Expired"state.

Authorization ExpiredRegistered

You don’t have smart license tokenor you have entered an invalidsmart license token.

Evaluation ModeUnregistered

Your evaluation period of 90 daysis completed.

Evaluation ExpiredUnregistered

Add Smart License TokenYou can associate the site with the Cisco Smart Account by providing the smart license token. The SmartLicense Token field is a placeholder for entering the smart license token ID. Currently, the BE4000 does notregister to the Cisco Smart Account. If you enter a smart license token ID, we recommend setting a validitydate of at least 180 days when the token is created.

Before you begin

Ensure that you have noted down the smart license token provided by Cisco.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Settings > Licensing.Step 4 Enter the smart license token ID received from Cisco in the Smart License Token field.Step 5 Click Save.

Configure Back Up Schedule for a SiteBE4000 allows you to back up your site configurations on a regular interval. You can set the day and timeduring which the system automatically backs up your site configuration. The previous five consecutive backupsare stored in the BE4000 portal.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide179

Manage Your SiteAdd Smart License Token

Page 190: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

• You cannot schedule more than one backup per day.

• Youmust configure at least one day in a week to back up your site configuration. If you have not scheduleda backup for your site, by default, the site is backed up every Saturday during the maintenance schedule.

Note

Before you begin

Ensure that BE4000 site is available in the Online state

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Settings > Maintenance Schedule.Step 4 Check the Back Up check box for the days when you want the site to back up the configurations.Step 5 Click Save.

If the scheduled back-up fails for a site in "Online" state, an email is sent to the customeradministrators to notify the failure.

Note

What to do next

Restore the backed-up site configuration. Refer to, Restore the Backed-Up Site Configuration, on page 180for more details.

Restore the Backed-Up Site ConfigurationBE4000 supports restoring the backed-up site configuration. You can restore any one of the previous fiveconsecutive backed-up site configurations.

Before you begin

• Ensure that the BE4000 site is available in the Online state

• A minimum of one backed-up configuration is available to restore

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from Actions menu for the desired site on the dashboard.Step 3 Click Settings > System Restore.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide180

Manage Your SiteRestore the Backed-Up Site Configuration

Page 191: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Step 4 Choose a backed-up configuration from the Please select a backup drop-down list.

The previous five consecutive back-ups are available to restore.

Step 5 Choose the configurations that you want to restore by clicking one from the following:

• All Data—Restores the complete site configuration that includes, phone, extension, dial plan, voicemail,and auto attendant data.

• Phone, Extensions, Dial Plan—Restores the phone, extensions, and dial plan data.

• Voicemail & Auto Attendant—Restores the voicemail and auto attendant data.

We recommend you to click All Data and restore the complete site configuration.Note

Step 6 Click Restore.

• The phone system goes offline and is made unavailable for use until the restoration is complete.

• The backup of the current settings is made first before the restoration begins.

Note

Delete a Customer Site• When you delete a site from the portal, all information related to that site is deleted from the portal. Ifthis is the customer’s only site, all customer information is deleted from the portal.

• If the BE4000 is deployed and online when a site is deleted, the BE4000 is reset to factory defaults andstops functioning. Phone calls can no longer be made or received.

• If a deployed site is offline when it is deleted, then BE4000 must be manually reset to factory defaultcondition before it can connect to the portal again.

Procedure

Step 1 Select a site from the partner portal.Step 2 Right-click and click Delete Site.Step 3 Click OK to confirm deletion.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide181

Manage Your SiteDelete a Customer Site

Page 192: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Manually Reset to Factory DefaultTo perform a factory reset manually, the local administration portal allows you to access the BE4000 applianceand perform a factory reset.

When the partner administrator performs a Delete Site on the BE4000 portal, the BE4000 is automaticallyreset to factory defaults, and a manual reset is not required.

If a manual factory reset is desired, perform it only after deleting the site from the BE4000 portal. If the factoryreset was performed before deleting a site, you must reload (power cycle) the appliance after deleting the sitefrom BE4000 portal and before it is deployed again.

Note

Choose one of the following two methods to connect to and reset the BE4000:

Console Based Factory Reset

Procedure

Step 1 Connect through RJ45 or USB console cable.Step 2 Log in with the username “status”. Password is not required.Step 3 Type R and press Enter to start the reset process.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide182

Manage Your SiteManually Reset to Factory Default

Page 193: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide183

Manage Your SiteConsole Based Factory Reset

Page 194: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Ethernet Based Factory Reset

Procedure

Step 1 Connect your computer back to back to MGMT port (use a normal Cat5e or Cat6 cable).Step 2 Use SSH client to connect to the BE4000 using either the MGMT IP Address (169.254.100.1) or Host Name

(status@be4000).Step 3 Log in with username status. No password is required.Step 4 Type h to see the available options.

Step 5 To reset the appliance, type R to start the process.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide184

Manage Your SiteEthernet Based Factory Reset

Page 195: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Reload the BE4000 ApplianceYou can switch off and on (power cycle) the BE4000 appliance if you are at the customer location or siteusing the power switch.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide185

Manage Your SiteReload the BE4000 Appliance

Page 196: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Reset OTPThe Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal allows you to reset the OTP when the recovery code islost.

The Reset OTP – From Another Partner User method requires a minimum of two users to be associatedwith a partner organization. The second user resets the account of the first user. The Reset OTP – Yourselfmethod allows you to reset the OTP account yourself.

Choose one of the following two methods to reset the OTP for Cisco Business Edition 4000 ManagementPortal:

Reset OTP—YourselfYou can now reset the One Time Password (OTP) account for yourself in the Cisco Business Edition 4000Management Portal.

Procedure

Step 1 Enter the URL https://be4000.cisco.com.Step 2 Click Sign in.Step 3 Click Use Recovery Code.Step 4 Click Don't have a recovery code?.

TheOTP Account Reset pop-up window notifies that an email has been sent to your registered email address.

Step 5 Click the link Reset OTP in the email.

Reset OTP—From Another Partner UserYou can now reset the One Time Password (OTP) account of another user within the same partner organization.

Procedure

Step 1 From the dashboard, click to reset the OTP account.My People page is displayed.

Step 2 Click Reset OTP from Actions menu for the desired user.

Update Primary Contact DetailsYou can update your primary contact details in the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner portal.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide186

Manage Your SiteReset OTP

Page 197: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Procedure

Step 1 From the dashboard, click on your name displayed on the top-right corner.Step 2 Click Settings. The Profile page is displayed.Step 3 Enter your primary contact number in the Primary Phone field.

The primary phone number must contain a minimum of 10 digits.Note

You cannot edit the email address. The email address is auto populated based on the informationprovided during partner registration.

Note

Step 4 Click Save.Step 5 Click OK.

Add Secondary OTP DevicesYou can add more devices to generate the One Time Password (OTP) required to access the BE4000 PartnerPortal.

Before you begin

A smart phone or tablet, other than the configured primary device, with One Time Password (OTP) client.

Procedure

Step 1 From the dashboard, click on your name that is displayed on the top-right corner.Step 2 Click Settings. The Settings page is displayed.Step 3 Click Add Device. Two-Step Authentication page is displayed with the list of configured devices.

The nicknames for the devices are displayed.Note

Step 4 Click Add Device at the bottom of configured devices list.Step 5 Enter a nickname for your device. The name entered here is displayed on the OTP application that is configured

on your smart phone or tablet.Step 6 Click the One Time Password (OTP) client radio button and click Next.Step 7 Scan the QR code using the OTP application on your smart phone or tablet and click Next.Step 8 Enter the 6-digit security code that is generated by the OTP application on your smart phone or tablet and

click Next.Step 9 Save the recovery code that is displayed on the screen and click Next. Newly added device is listed in the

Two-Step Authentication page.

This recovery code is used to log in to the portal if you lose or replace your smart phone or tablet.Note

Step 10 (Optional) From the drop-down for the secondary device, clickPrimary to make the secondary device primary.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide187

Manage Your SiteAdd Secondary OTP Devices

Page 198: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

You can set a secondary device as your primary device, from the sign-in screen as well.Note

Log In to the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management PortalUsing Recovery Code

If you have changed or lost your smart phone on which you had the OTP application configured with theBE4000, use the recovery code for logging in to the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal.

Before you begin

Have the recovery code that you received when you registered to the Cisco Business Edition 4000ManagementPortal.

Procedure

Step 1 Enter the URL https://be4000.cisco.com.Step 2 Click Sign in.Step 3 Click Use Recovery Code.Step 4 Enter the recovery code in the Recovery Code field.

Using the recovery code permanently deletes all additional OTP accounts that you have created.Note

Step 5 Click Continue.Step 6 Accept the Terms of Service.Step 7 Click Continue.Step 8 Enter the device name. The name entered here is displayed on the OTP application that is configured on your

smart phone. Click Continue.Step 9 Use the OTP application to scan the QR code. Click Continue.Step 10 Enter the security code that is generated by your OTP application. Click Continue.Step 11 Save the Recovery Code displayed on the screen.Step 12 Click Continue.

Sign In to BE4000 Partner Portal Using a Secondary OTP DeviceYou can login to the BE4000 Partner Portal using any of the smart phones or tablets that you have configuredwith BE4000.

Before you begin

A smart phone or tablet configured with One Time Password (OTP) application.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide188

Manage Your SiteLog In to the Cisco Business Edition 4000 Management Portal Using Recovery Code

Page 199: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Procedure

Step 1 Go to the URL: https://be4000.cisco.com/.Step 2 Sign in using your Cisco.com credentials.Step 3 Click Change Device.Step 4 Choose a device from the Select your TOTP device drop-down list.Step 5 Click Continue.Step 6 Enter the security code generated by your OTP application on your smart phone or tablet and clickContinue.

Manage Customer AdministratorsCisco Partners and Customer Administrators can add additional Customer Administrators. The newly addedCustomer Administrator can view all the BE4000 sites that are associated with the customer organization.

Add Additional Customer Administrators

Before you begin

Have the name, email address, and contact number of the new customer administrator ready.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 On the dashboard, hover the mouse on the row containing desired customer name and clickManage Customer

> Customer Admin.Step 3 Click Add Admin.Step 4 Enter the Name, Email, Contact Number. Role is chosen as "Admin" by default.Step 5 Click Save.

An email containing the link to register to the Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal is sent to the enteredemail address.

Change Customer Administrator for a BE4000 SiteYou can change the customer administrator who is assigned for a BE4000 site.

Before you begin

BE4000 site must be online.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide189

Manage Your SiteManage Customer Administrators

Page 200: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 Click Manage Site from the Actions column for the desired site.Step 3 Click edit (pen icon) under Contact Information.Step 4 Choose the desired customer administrator's email address from theCustomer Admin Email drop-down list.

Only the administrators belonging to the same customer is listed in the drop-down. The Contact Name fieldgets auto-populated based the chosen email address.

Step 5 Enter the phone number in the Outside Phone Number field. Provide the mobile number or a number thatcan be reached by outside the BE4000 system. Do not enter the extensions within the BE4000 system.

Reset Password for a Customer Administrator OTP AccountYou can reset the One Time Password (OTP) account of a customer administrator who owns a BE4000 sitethat is in the Online state.

Procedure

Step 1 Click Manage Site from the Actions column for the desired site.Step 2 Click edit (pen icon) under Contact Information.Step 3 Click Reset OTP.

Resetting the OTP account mandates the customer administrator to create a new OTP applicationaccount when logging in to the Cisco Business Edition Selfcare Portal.

Note

Modify Customer Administrator's Phone Number

Procedure

Step 1 Click Manage Site from the Actions column for the desired site.Step 2 Click edit (pen icon) under Contact Information.Step 3 Enter the phone number. Provide the mobile number or a number that can be reached by outside the BE4000

system. Do not enter the extensions within the BE4000 system.Step 4 Click Save.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide190

Manage Your SiteReset Password for a Customer Administrator OTP Account

Page 201: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Remove Customer AdministratorA Cisco Partner or Customer Administrator can remove Customer Administrators. When a CustomerAdministrator is removed, the admin permissions to view and modify BE4000 sites is also removed.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the BE4000 portal.Step 2 On the dashboard, hover the mouse on the row containing desired customer name and clickManage Customer

> Customer Admin

Step 3 Click Remove Admin from the "Action" column corresponding to the desired customer administrator.Step 4 Click Remove.

If the customer administrator who was removed had a BE4000 site assigned, then the portal automaticallyassigns the customer administrator who performed the "Remove Admin" action as the new customeradministrator.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide191

Manage Your SiteRemove Customer Administrator

Page 202: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide192

Manage Your SiteRemove Customer Administrator

Page 203: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

A P P E N D I X ASetup Assistant

• Add Customer Field Descriptions, on page 193• Connectivity Field Descriptions, on page 194• Dial Plan Field Descriptions, on page 219• Stations Field Descriptions, on page 221• Call Routing Field Descriptions, on page 223• Features Field Descriptions, on page 233

Add Customer Field DescriptionsAdd Customer Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter the name of the customer. You can enter a maximum of 15 characters.

One customer can have multiple sites. Each site needs one BE4000appliance. Each site is configured separately.

Note

Customer Name

Enter the location of the customer. You can enter a maximum of 15 characters.Location

Enter the email address of the customer administrator.Customer Admin Email

Enter the name of the customer administrator.Contact Name

Enter the phone number of the customer administrator.Phone Number

Select an existing customer site template. Template saves the site configurations(connectivity details, dial plans, stations, call routing and feature details). Usingtemplate, you can avoid rekeying the configuration details while creating a newsite similar to an existing site configuration.

If you are creating a site for the first time, you may not find anyexisting templates listed in the drop-down.

Note

Template Name

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide193

Page 204: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Connectivity Field Descriptions

The following IP Networks are not supported:

• 10.0.1.x/24

• 10.0.2.x/24

• 10.0.3.x/24

• 10.1.1.x/24

• 10.1.2.x/24

• 10.1.3.x/24

• 10.2.x.x/16

• 10.3.x.x/16

Note

LAN Connection Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Network Details

Enter IP address of the BE4000 appliance. Ensure that the IP address matcheswith that of the customer subnet address and ports (UDP 500, UDP 4500, andESP 50) are connected, active, and reachable to the internet. Check the status ofthe ports using Cisco Business Edition 4000 Port Check Tool.

BE4000 IP Address

Enter the IP address of the voicemail server. Voicemail IP address cannot be thesame as BE4000 IP address.

Voicemail IP Address

Enter the IP subnet mask. For example, 255.255.255.0 is an IP subnet mask.Subnet Mask

Enter the default gateway address.Gateway Address

Enter the ISP label. In case, there are issues in deploying the BE4000, the ISPlabel helps technicians to check if the fault is with the service provider. ISP labelis an arbitrary identifier.

Internet Service Provider(ISP)

SMTP Server - Enables Voicemail to Email Functionality

The SMTP Server configuration is required for voicemail to Email functionality, wherein voicemail receivedby an extension is sent as an email attachment to the registered email address.

• If the customer has Office 365, Configure Office 365, on page 168 first.

• If the customer has their own SMTP relay (other than Office 365), ensure that the proprietary certificatesof the SMTP relay are trusted by BE4000.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide194

Setup AssistantConnectivity Field Descriptions

Page 205: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Enter the IP Address or Domain Name of the SMTP server. You can enter amaximum of 100 characters for the domain name.

You can configure Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of publicSMTP servers only. BE4000 handles all Domain Name System (DNS)resolutions through the internet and thus only public FQDNs areaccepted. For example, smtp.office365.com, smtp.gmail.com.

Note

IP Address or DomainName

Enter the port number. Default value is 25.Port

Choose one of the secure modes:

• None

• SSL—Provide ways to encrypt a communication channel between twocomputers.

• STARTTLS—An extension to the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)service that allows an SMTP server and client to use Transport Layer Security(TLS) to provide private, authenticated communication over the internet.

Security Mode

Enter an email address that is used as “From” address to send emails containingvoicemail as an attachment. Ensure that the SMTP server allows receiving emailsfrom the entered email address.

Sender's Email Address

Check the "Authenticate" check box to ensure that the voicemail to emailfunctionality is secure. Enter a username and password that needs to be filled bythe users while accessing the voicemail from email.

Authenticate

System Settings Field Descriptions

Choose unique digits for dialing an outside line, sending a call to voicemail automatically, and dialing anintercom extension.

Note

DescriptionField

Choose a digit to make a call to an outside phone number. You can set any digitbetween 0 to 6, 8, and 9. You cannot set * and 7. Default is 9. Users should dialthis digit before dialing an external phone number.

Dial an Outside Line

Choose the total number of digits in an extension. You can set your extensionto contain 3, 4, or 5 digits. Default is 4.

Extension length

Choose the number of seconds to wait after each digit is entered, before assumingthe caller has finished entering digits. Range is from 0 to 9. Default is 5.

Interdigit Timeout

Choose a digit to dial for sending a call to voicemail automatically. Range isfrom 1 to 6. Default is 2.

Send to VoicemailAutomatically

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide195

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 206: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Choose a digit to dial for making an intercom call. Range is from 1 to 6. Defaultis 4.

Intercom

Advanced Options

Choose to enable or disable forwarding local. This decides if internal (local)calls can be forwarded.

Forwarding Local

Set the phone redirect limit. Limits the maximum number of 3XX responsesthat can be accepted for a single call. Range is from 5 to 20. By default, 5 isentered.

Phone Redirect Limit

Direct Inward Dial (DID)

Direct Inward Dial (DID) numbers are the registered numbers received from your service provider. Add theDID numbers for the SIP and ISDN (PRI and BRI) connections. Do not add FXO line numbers here. TheFXO line numbers can be added while adding Line Cards (NIM) details.

DID numbers can be added in two ways:

• Click "Add Row" and add the DID numbers and service name one by one.

• Download the template provided on the screen. Fill in the details and upload all the DIDs in one go.

• DID numbers must be entered in E.164 format. A minimum of 10 digits is required for the DID number.For example: +14155552671

• Only up to 98 DID numbers are supported for SIP trunks and 98 DID numbers for ISDN trunks (PRIand BRI).

Note

Direct Dial Numbers Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Click to add DID numbers manually.Add Row

Click to download the template provided on the screen.Download Template

Click to browse and upload the file containing DID numbers.Choose file

Enter a service name for each DID. Provide any name that is easy to identify theservice to which each DID number belongs to.

Service Name

Add the DID numbers received from your service provider for each row.Registered Numbers

You can delete the individual rows of DID numbers.Delete

Click to remove all the DID numbers displayed on the page.Replace this list

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide196

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 207: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

SIP Trunks Field Descriptions

Turn on the slider to configure SIP trunks.

Choose your provider from the "Provider Template" or use "Custom". To have a new provider added astemplate, or to request assistance, contact the dedicated SIP Support Team. Do not open a TAC case as theywill not be able to assist you.

Note

Service Settings Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Choose a service name from the drop-down list. The service names added in theDirect Inward Dial (DID) Numbers page are listed in the drop-down.

Service Name

Choose a preconfigured provider template based on your SIP service provider.If your SIP service provider is not in the drop-down list, choose "Custom".

Provider Template

Interface Settings Field Descriptions

DescriptionsField

Choose the type of interface connectivity for SIP trunk. Primary interface refersto GE 0/0/0 and Secondary interface refers to GE 0/0/1. Primary interface isalways connected to the internet service provider. If the internet service providerand SIP trunk service provider are different, use secondary interface for SIP trunkconnectivity.

• Proxy Server Field Descriptions—SIP trunk and internet connectivity isprovided by the same service provider.

• Secondary Interfacewith Static Address—SIP trunk and internet are providedby two separate service providers. Internet service provider is connectedusing the primary interface and SIP trunk service provider is connected usingthe secondary interface. The SIP trunk service provider provides static IPaddress for the network connectivity.

• Secondary Interface with Dynamic Address—SIP trunk and internet areprovided by two separate service providers. Internet service provider isconnected using the primary interface and SIP trunk service provider isconnected using the secondary interface. The SIP trunk service providerprovides dynamic IP address for the network connectivity.

Use Secondary Interfacefor Trunk?

Enter the public IP address assigned by your internet service provider so that SIPservices work across Network Address Translation (NAT).

External Public Address

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide197

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 208: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

No Secondary Interface

Proxy Server Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter an IP address and Port, Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) and Port,or SRV record for your service proxy.

Enter a unique address that does not overlap with the address that isassigned for Gig 0/0/0 interface, Gig 0/0/1 interface, and SMTP server.

Note

Proxy Address

Optional. If you have provided an IP address for the proxy, you may also specifya non-standard SIP port if necessary. Leave blank to use port 5060.

Proxy Port

Outbound Proxy

Enter an IP Address, fully qualified domain name, or domain SRV for yourservice outbound proxy if one is used.

Enter a unique address that does not overlap with the address that isassigned for Gig 0/0/0 interface, Gig 0/0/1 interface, and SMTP server.

Note

Outbound Proxy Address

Optional. If you have provided an IP address for the outbound proxy, you mayalso specify a non-standard SIP port if necessary. Leave blank to use port 5060.

Outbound Proxy Port

Call Authentication

Enter the username and password if your service provider requires authenticationfor every call.

Username and Password

Enter the authentication realm for call authentication. Typically, authenticationrealm is the service domain name.

Authentication Realm

Check the "Include in Invite" check box, if your service provider requiresauthentication details to be sent in the initial invite. If unchecked, authenticationis provided in the response to a 407 challenge.

Include in Invite

Proxy Server—Advanced Options Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter the minimum value for the session expiry parameter sent in the initial invite.Range is from 90 to 86,400 seconds. Unless instructed by your SIP serviceprovider, the default value of 90 seconds must be used.

Min-SE

Enter the maximum duration of a session in seconds. During a call, the sessionexpiry time is periodically refreshed based on the value entered here. Range isfrom 90 to 86,400 seconds. Unless instructed by your provider, the default valueof 1800 seconds should be used.

Session Expires

Limit the range of ports used for RTP. Enter even numbers between 8,000 to48,198.

RTP Port Range

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide198

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 209: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Choose the protocol used for transport layer by your service provider.Transport Layer

Choose one of the ITU-T T.38 standard Fax Transmission Protocols to be usedfor a specific VoIP dial peer. Available options are:

• T.38

• T.38 fall back to G.711 u-law

• T.38 fall back to G.711 a-law

• Pass Through G711u

• Pass Through G711a

Fax TransmissionProtocol

Choose one of the following as the DTMF signaling mechanism based on theprotocol offered by your SIP service provider.

• RFC2833

• sip-notify

DTMFSignaling Protocol

Choose one of the following for calling party header selection:

• From

• Remote Party ID (RPID)

• P-AID Pilot DID

• P-AID Assigned DIDs

Calling Party HeaderSelection

Leave the "Calling Party Domain" field blank to send the BE4000 IP addresswith calling party headers. Enter a domain name or full qualified domain if youwant to replace the BE4000 IP address.

Calling Party Domain

"Pilot Number" field is displayed only when "Calling Party HeaderSelection" drop-down is chosen as "P-AID Pilot DID".

Note

Choose the "Pilot Number" from the drop-down list if the service provider requiresa specific number to be used for P-Asserted Identity Headers.

Pilot Number

Enter the dialing prefix if the service provider allows calling line ID to be withheldon a call by call basis.

CLI Restriction Prefix

Uncheck the "RFC3555 Compliant G.729 Annex B" check box if the call serveris not RFC3555 compliant for G.729AnnexB SDP formatting (Adds g729-annexboverride). Check if you are unsure.

RFC3555 CompliantG.729 Annex B

Check the "Two way media override" check box to override modification ofmedia stream from send/receive to sendonly or inactive.When checked, two waymedia is always be requested.

Two way media override

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide199

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 210: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Check the Redirection option to reset the default processing of 3xx messages.By default, SIP gateways process all incoming 3xx redirect messages accordingto RFC 2543. However if the Redirection option is disabled, the gateway treatsthe incoming 3xx responses as 4xx error class responses.

Redirection should be selected by default and only unselected if required by theSIP trunk provider.

Redirection (Optional)

Options Ping

Enable to monitor the SIP service availability allowing traffic to be rerouted, if possible, in the event offailure.

Enter the period between Options packets being sent while the service isconsidered to be up. Range is from 5 to 1,200 seconds. Default is 60 seconds.

Service Up Interval

Enter the period between Options packets being sent while the service isconsidered to be down. Range is from 5 to 1,200 seconds. Default is 30 seconds.

Service Down Interval

Enter the number of missed responses allowed before a service is consideredunavailable. Range is from 1 to 10. Default is 5.

Retries

Registrar Server

Registrar server can be configured either through DHCP or by providing IP address and port. Click one ofthe following options based on your network:

• Configure via DHCP

• Configure address and port

Registrar Server Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter an IP Address, fully qualified domain name, or domain SRV for serviceregistrar.

This field appears only when you choose Configure address and port.

Enter a unique address that does not overlap with the address that isassigned for Gig 0/0/0 interface, Gig 0/0/1 interface, and SMTP server.

Note

Registrar Address

If you have provided an IP address for the registrar, you may also specify anon-standard SIP port if necessary. Leave blank to use port 5060.

This field appears only when you choose Configure address and port.

Registrar Port

Enter the authentication realm used for registration by your service provider.Mandatory if Registrar Address or DHCP is configured.

Authentication Realm

Check the "Registrar with Realm" configuring the registrar with the realminformation provided for the proxy. Uncheck to remove the configuration.

Registrar with realm

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide200

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 211: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Enter the username and password, if the service provider requires per callauthentication.

Username and Password

Select appropriate DID for each username if the service provider requires a DIDto be included with registration authentication.

Include DID

Click to add multiple rows for username, password, and include DID. You canadd a maximum of 98 rows.

Add Row

Registrar Server—Advanced Options Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter the Registration Timeout period. Determines how frequently the systemregisters.

Registration Timeout

Choose TCP or UDP from the "Transport Layer" drop-down list as the transportprotocol used by the service provider.

Transport Layer

Security

Add at least one trusted IP Address. The BE4000 accepts incoming VoIP (SIP) calls only if the remote IPaddress of an incoming VoIP call matches an address in the trusted IP address list. Enter the IP addressesprovided for proxy, outbound proxy, and registrar from your service provider. IP addresses must be providedif hostnames are used. Entries can be provided either as a host address (x.x.x.x) or subnet (x.x.x.x /nn)."

Security Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter a trusted IP address to authenticate incoming SIP trunk calls for toll fraudprevention.

Trusted IP Address

Click "Add Row" and enter the trusted IP addresses.Add Row

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide201

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 212: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Secondary Interface with Static Address

Interface Settings

DescriptionField

Ethernet ports usually use the auto-negotiate protocol settings. If your switchdoes not support this option by itself, choose from the following interface options:

• Auto Negotiate

• Gigabit Ethernet

• Fast Ethernet Full Duplex

• Fast Ethernet Half Duplex

• Ethernet Full Duplex

• Ethernet Half Duplex

By default, Auto Negotiate is selected.Note

Interface Options

Enter IP address and subnet mask of the secondary interface. The fields aremandatory.

IP Address and Mask

Enter the IP address of the default gateway. This field is mandatory.Default Gateway

Enter the IP address of the dedicated, private DNS used by your service provider.Ensure that you enter the name server addresses even if they are provided viaDHCP. You can enter a maximum of 6 IP addresses separated by spaces.

Name Servers

Enter To ensure that SIP services work across Network Address Translation,provide the public IP address provided by your service provider.

External Public Address

Proxy Server Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter an IP address and Port, Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) and Port,or SRV record for your service proxy.

Enter a unique address that does not overlap with the address that isassigned for Gig 0/0/0 interface, Gig 0/0/1 interface, and SMTP server.

Note

Proxy Address

Optional. If you have provided an IP address for the proxy, you may also specifya non-standard SIP port if necessary. Leave blank to use port 5060.

Proxy Port

Outbound Proxy

Enter an IP Address, fully qualified domain name, or domain SRV for yourservice outbound proxy if one is used.

Enter a unique address that does not overlap with the address that isassigned for Gig 0/0/0 interface, Gig 0/0/1 interface, and SMTP server.

Note

Outbound Proxy Address

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide202

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 213: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Optional. If you have provided an IP address for the outbound proxy, you mayalso specify a non-standard SIP port if necessary. Leave blank to use port 5060.

Outbound Proxy Port

Call Authentication

Enter the username and password if your service provider requires authenticationfor every call.

Username and Password

Enter the authentication realm for call authentication. Typically, authenticationrealm is the service domain name.

Authentication Realm

Check the "Include in Invite" check box, if your service provider requiresauthentication details to be sent in the initial invite. If unchecked, authenticationis provided in the response to a 407 challenge.

Include in Invite

Proxy Server—Advanced Options Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter the minimum value for the session expiry parameter sent in the initial invite.Range is from 90 to 86,400 seconds. Unless instructed by your SIP serviceprovider, the default value of 90 seconds must be used.

Min-SE

Enter the maximum duration of a session in seconds. During a call, the sessionexpiry time is periodically refreshed based on the value entered here. Range isfrom 90 to 86,400 seconds. Unless instructed by your provider, the default valueof 1800 seconds should be used.

Session Expires

Limit the range of ports used for RTP. Enter even numbers between 8,000 to48,198.

RTP Port Range

Choose the protocol used for transport layer by your service provider.Transport Layer

Choose one of the ITU-T T.38 standard Fax Transmission Protocols to be usedfor a specific VoIP dial peer. Available options are:

• T.38

• T.38 fall back to G.711 u-law

• T.38 fall back to G.711 a-law

• Pass Through G711u

• Pass Through G711a

Fax TransmissionProtocol

Choose one of the following as the DTMF signaling mechanism based on theprotocol offered by your SIP service provider.

• RFC2833

• sip-notify

DTMFSignaling Protocol

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide203

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 214: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Choose one of the following for calling party header selection:

• From

• Remote Party ID (RPID)

• P-AID Pilot DID

• P-AID Assigned DIDs

Calling Party HeaderSelection

Leave the "Calling Party Domain" field blank to send the BE4000 IP addresswith calling party headers. Enter a domain name or full qualified domain if youwant to replace the BE4000 IP address.

Calling Party Domain

"Pilot Number" field is displayed only when "Calling Party HeaderSelection" drop-down is chosen as "P-AID Pilot DID".

Note

Choose the "Pilot Number" from the drop-down list if the service provider requiresa specific number to be used for P-Asserted Identity Headers.

Pilot Number

Enter the dialing prefix if the service provider allows calling line ID to be withheldon a call by call basis.

CLI Restriction Prefix

Uncheck the "RFC3555 Compliant G.729 Annex B" check box if the call serveris not RFC3555 compliant for G.729AnnexB SDP formatting (Adds g729-annexboverride). Check if you are unsure.

RFC3555 CompliantG.729 Annex B

Check the "Two way media override" check box to override modification ofmedia stream from send/receive to sendonly or inactive.When checked, two waymedia is always be requested.

Two way media override

Check the "Redirection (Optional)" to reset the default processing of 3xxmessages. By default, SIP gateways process all incoming 3xx redirect messagesaccording to RFC 2543. However if the Redirection option is disabled, the gatewaytreats the incoming 3xx responses as 4xx error class responses.

Redirection should be selected by default and only unselected if required by theSIP trunk provider.

Redirection (Optional)

Options Ping

Enable to monitor the SIP service availability allowing traffic to be rerouted, if possible, in the event offailure.

Enter the period between Options packets being sent while the service isconsidered to be up. Range is from 5 to 1,200 seconds. Default is 60 seconds.

Service Up Interval

Enter the period between Options packets being sent while the service isconsidered to be down. Range is from 5 to 1,200 seconds. Default is 30 seconds.

Service Down Interval

Enter the number of missed responses allowed before a service is consideredunavailable. Range is from 1 to 10. Default is 5.

Retries

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide204

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 215: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Registrar Server

Registrar server can be configured either through DHCP or by providing IP address and port. Click one ofthe following options based on your network:

• Configure via DHCP

• Configure address and port

Registrar Server Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter an IP Address, fully qualified domain name, or domain SRV for serviceregistrar.

This field appears only when you choose Configure address and port.

Enter a unique address that does not overlap with the address that isassigned for Gig 0/0/0 interface, Gig 0/0/1 interface, and SMTP server.

Note

Registrar Address

If you have provided an IP address for the registrar, you may also specify anon-standard SIP port if necessary. Leave blank to use port 5060.

This field appears only when you choose Configure address and port.

Registrar Port

Enter the authentication realm used for registration by your service provider.Mandatory if Registrar Address or DHCP is configured.

Authentication Realm

Check the "Registrar with Realm" configuring the registrar with the realminformation provided for the proxy. Uncheck to remove the configuration.

Registrar with realm

Enter the username and password, if the service provider requires per callauthentication.

Username and Password

Choose appropriate DID for each username if the service provider requires a DIDto be included with registration authentication.

Include DID

Click to add multiple rows for username, password, and include DID. You canadd a maximum of 98 rows.

Add Row

Registrar Server—Advanced Options Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter the Registration Timeout period. Determines how frequently the systemregisters.

Registration Timeout

Choose TCP or UDP from the "Transport Layer" drop-down list as the transportprotocol used by the service provider.

Transport Layer

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide205

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 216: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Security

Add at least one trusted IP Address. The BE4000 accepts incoming VoIP (SIP) calls only if the remote IPaddress of an incoming VoIP call matches an address in the trusted IP address list. Enter the IP addressesprovided for proxy, outbound proxy, and registrar from your service provider. IP addresses must be providedif hostnames are used. Entries can be provided either as a host address (x.x.x.x) or subnet (x.x.x.x /nn)."

Security Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter a trusted IP address to authenticate incoming SIP trunk calls for toll fraudprevention.

Trusted IP Address

Click "Add Row" and enter the trusted IP addresses.Add Row

Secondary Interface with Dynamic Address

Interface Settings

DescriptionField

Ethernet ports usually use the auto-negotiate protocol settings. If your switchdoes not support this option by itself, choose from the following interface options:

• Auto Negotiate

• Gigabit Ethernet

• Fast Ethernet Full Duplex

• Fast Ethernet Half Duplex

• Ethernet Full Duplex

• Ethernet Half Duplex

By default, Auto Negotiate is selected.Note

Interface Options

Enter the IP address of the dedicated, private DNS used by your service provider.Ensure that you enter the name server addresses even if they are provided viaDHCP. You can enter a maximum of 6 IP addresses separated by spaces.

Name Servers

Enter To ensure that SIP services work across Network Address Translation,provide the public IP address provided by your service provider.

External Public Address

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide206

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 217: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Proxy Server Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter an IP address and Port, Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) and Port,or SRV record for your service proxy.

Enter a unique address that does not overlap with the address that isassigned for Gig 0/0/0 interface, Gig 0/0/1 interface, and SMTP server.

Note

Proxy Address

Optional. If you have provided an IP address for the proxy, you may also specifya non-standard SIP port if necessary. Leave blank to use port 5060.

Proxy Port

Outbound Proxy

Enter an IP Address, fully qualified domain name, or domain SRV for yourservice outbound proxy if one is used.

Enter a unique address that does not overlap with the address that isassigned for Gig 0/0/0 interface, Gig 0/0/1 interface, and SMTP server.

Note

Outbound Proxy Address

Optional. If you have provided an IP address for the outbound proxy, you mayalso specify a non-standard SIP port if necessary. Leave blank to use port 5060.

Outbound Proxy Port

Call Authentication

Enter the username and password if your service provider requires authenticationfor every call.

Username and Password

Enter the authentication realm for call authentication. Typically, authenticationrealm is the service domain name.

Authentication Realm

Check the "Include in Invite" check box, if your service provider requiresauthentication details to be sent in the initial invite. If unchecked, authenticationis provided in the response to a 407 challenge.

Include in Invite

Proxy Server—Advanced Options Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter the minimum value for the session expiry parameter sent in the initial invite.Range is from 90 to 86,400 seconds. Unless instructed by your SIP serviceprovider, the default value of 90 seconds must be used.

Min-SE

Enter the maximum duration of a session in seconds. During a call, the sessionexpiry time is periodically refreshed based on the value entered here. Range isfrom 90 to 86,400 seconds. Unless instructed by your provider, the default valueof 1800 seconds should be used.

Session Expires

Limit the range of ports used for RTP. Enter even numbers between 8,000 to48,198.

RTP Port Range

Choose the protocol used for transport layer by your service provider.Transport Layer

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide207

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 218: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Choose one of the ITU-T T.38 standard Fax Transmission Protocols to be usedfor a specific VoIP dial peer. Available options are:

• T.38

• T.38 fall back to G.711 u-law

• T.38 fall back to G.711 a-law

• Pass Through G711u

• Pass Through G711a

Fax TransmissionProtocol

Choose one of the following as the DTMF signaling mechanism based on theprotocol offered by your SIP service provider.

• RFC2833

• sip-notify

DTMFSignaling Protocol

Choose one of the following for calling party header selection:

• From

• Remote Party ID (RPID)

• P-AID Pilot DID

• P-AID Assigned DIDs

Calling Party HeaderSelection

Leave the "Calling Party Domain" field blank to send the BE4000 IP addresswith calling party headers. Enter a domain name or full qualified domain if youwant to replace the BE4000 IP address.

Calling Party Domain

"Pilot Number" field is displayed only when "Calling Party HeaderSelection" drop-down is chosen as "P-AID Pilot DID".

Note

Choose the "Pilot Number" from the drop-down list if the service provider requiresa specific number to be used for P-Asserted Identity Headers.

Pilot Number

Enter the dialing prefix if the service provider allows calling line ID to be withheldon a call by call basis.

CLI Restriction Prefix

Uncheck the "RFC3555 Compliant G.729 Annex B" check box if the call serveris not RFC3555 compliant for G.729AnnexB SDP formatting (Adds g729-annexboverride). Check if you are unsure.

RFC3555 CompliantG.729 Annex B

Check the "Two way media override" check box to override modification ofmedia stream from send/receive to sendonly or inactive.When checked, two waymedia is always be requested.

Two way media override

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide208

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 219: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Check the "Redirection (Optional)" to reset the default processing of 3xxmessages. By default, SIP gateways process all incoming 3xx redirect messagesaccording to RFC 2543. However if the Redirection option is disabled, the gatewaytreats the incoming 3xx responses as 4xx error class responses.

Redirection should be selected by default and only unselected if required by theSIP trunk provider.

Redirection (Optional)

Options Ping

Enable to monitor the SIP service availability allowing traffic to be rerouted, if possible, in the event offailure.

Enter the period between Options packets being sent while the service isconsidered to be up. Range is from 5 to 1,200 seconds. Default is 60 seconds.

Service Up Interval

Enter the period between Options packets being sent while the service isconsidered to be down. Range is from 5 to 1,200 seconds. Default is 30 seconds.

Service Down Interval

Enter the number of missed responses allowed before a service is consideredunavailable. Range is from 1 to 10. Default is 5.

Retries

Registrar Server

Registrar server can be configured either through DHCP or by providing IP address and port. Click one ofthe following options based on your network:

• Configure via DHCP

• Configure address and port

Registrar Server Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter an IP Address, fully qualified domain name, or domain SRV for serviceregistrar.

This field appears only when you choose Configure address and port.

Enter a unique address that does not overlap with the address that isassigned for Gig 0/0/0 interface, Gig 0/0/1 interface, and SMTP server.

Note

Registrar Address

If you have provided an IP address for the registrar, you may also specify anon-standard SIP port if necessary. Leave blank to use port 5060.

This field appears only when you choose Configure address and port.

Registrar Port

Enter the authentication realm used for registration by your service provider.Mandatory if Registrar Address or DHCP is configured.

Authentication Realm

Check the "Registrar with Realm" configuring the registrar with the realminformation provided for the proxy. Uncheck to remove the configuration.

Registrar with realm

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide209

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 220: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Enter the username and password, if the service provider requires per callauthentication.

Username and Password

Choose appropriate DID for each username if the service provider requires a DIDto be included with registration authentication.

Include DID

Click to add multiple rows for username, password, and include DID. You canadd a maximum of 98 rows.

Add Row

Registrar Server—Advanced Options Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter the Registration Timeout period. Determines how frequently the systemregisters.

Registration Timeout

Choose TCP or UDP from the "Transport Layer" drop-down list as the transportprotocol used by the service provider.

Transport Layer

Security

Add at least one trusted IP Address. The BE4000 accepts incoming VoIP (SIP) calls only if the remote IPaddress of an incoming VoIP call matches an address in the trusted IP address list. Enter the IP addressesprovided for proxy, outbound proxy, and registrar from your service provider. IP addresses must be providedif hostnames are used. Entries can be provided either as a host address (x.x.x.x) or subnet (x.x.x.x /nn)."

Security Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter a trusted IP address to authenticate incoming SIP trunk calls for toll fraudprevention.

Trusted IP Address

Click "Add Row" and enter the trusted IP addresses.Add Row

Line Cards Field Descriptions

BE4000 allows you to connect to traditional telephony services and devices by adding Network InterfaceModules (NIM). You can add a maximum of two NIM cards. For the list of supported NIM cards, referSupported Line Cards.

Turn on the slider for the NIM cardslot where you want to insert the NIM card.

DescriptionField

Select the NIM card as per your connectivity requirements.NIM 1

Select the NIM card as per your connectivity requirements.NIM 2

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide210

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 221: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

NIM-2FXS or NIM-4FXS

DescriptionField

If you are using NIM-2FXS or NIM-4FXS, input the following details:

Choose one of the following:

• Disabled—The line is inactive.

• Analog Phone—The line is connected to an analog phone.

• Paging—The line is connected to an external paging system.

• Automatic Ringdown—The line is connected to a phone that has a dedicatedconnection with another phone. When the phone connected to this line goesoff hook, the destination phone rings. There is no need to dial any number.

Type

Enter the label to identify each line.Label

Enter the extension number.Extension

This field is visible only when you choose "Automatic Ringdown"from the Type drop-down list.

Note

Enter the extension of the destination phone that rings when the phone goes offhook.

Destination

Choose one of the following Class of Restriction (COR):

• internal

• local

• local-plus

• national

• national-plus

• international

Class of Restriction decides the type of calls that can be placed from the FXSphone line.

Note • You must select the Class of Restriction (COR) for every linewhile adding FXS cards in the Setup Assistant.

• This field is available only when you chooseAnalog Phone fromthe "Type" drop-down list.

Restrictions

Choose the type of algorithm used for modifying an input signal for digitization:

• u-law

• a-law

Law

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide211

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 222: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

The amount of amplification or deamplification of sound in terms of decibels.Range is from -6 to 14 db. Default value for FXO line is 0 db and for FXS lineis 6 db.

This field is available only while editing the line cards containing FXSand FXO lines. This field does not appear while adding the line cardduring initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant wizard) or postsite deployment (under Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) > Add NIMCard).

Note

Input Gain (db)

The value that is configured for minimizing the signal loss. Range is from -6 to14 db. Default value for FXO and FXS line is 0 db.

This field is available only while editing the line cards containing FXSand FXO lines. This field does not appear while adding the line cardduring initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant wizard) or postsite deployment (under Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) > Add NIMCard).

Note

Output Attenuation (db)

NIM-2FXO or NIM-4FXO

DescriptionField

If you are using NIM-2FXO or NIM-4FXO, input the following details:

Choose one of the following:

• Disabled—The line is inactive.

• Trunk—The line is connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network.

• Paging—The line is connected to an external paging system.

Type

Enter the label name.Label

This field appears only when "Trunk" is chosen from the "Type"drop-down list.

Note

Enter a name for the trunk line.

Name

Enter the number for analog phone line.Extension

This field appears only when "Trunk" is chosen from the "Type"drop-down list.

Note

Enter the number for the trunk line.

Number

Choose one of the following:

• Ground

• Loop Start

Start Type

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide212

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 223: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Mark the line as incoming only or bidirectional. The system builds the trunkgroups based on what you select.

• In + Out—Allows the phone line to receive and make calls.

• Inbound Only—Allows the phone line to receive the calls.

Direction

Choose the type of algorithm used for modifying an input signal for digitization:

• u-law

• a-law

Law

The amount of amplification or deamplification of sound in terms of decibels.Range is from -6 to 14 db. Default value for FXO line is 0 db and for FXS lineis 6 db.

This field is available only while editing the line cards containing FXSand FXO lines. This field does not appear while adding the line cardduring initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant wizard) or postsite deployment (under Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) > Add NIMCard).

Note

Input Gain (db)

The value that is configured for minimizing the signal loss. Range is from -6 to14 db. Default value for FXO and FXS line is 0 db.

This field is available only while editing the line cards containing FXSand FXO lines. This field does not appear while adding the line cardduring initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant wizard) or postsite deployment (under Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) > Add NIMCard).

Note

Output Attenuation (db)

Displays the advanced fields.Show Advanced

Configuration Voice Port Commands

The following fields are displayed only when the Show Advanced check box is checked.Note

Enables or disables cable polling on an analog Foreign Exchange Office (FXO)port.

Cable Detect

Configuring "Bearer Capability" drop-down list does not have anyaffect on the FXO port.

Note

Specifies the information transfer capability of the bearer capability informationelement (IE) in the outgoing ISDNSETUPmessage for Session Initiation Protocol(SIP) early-media calls. You can choose one of the following:

• Speech—Specifies speech as the information transfer capability.

• 3100hz—Specifies 3.1 kHz audio as the information transfer capability.

Bearer Capability

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide213

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 224: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Configures the type of supervisory disconnect signaling available on the FXOport. When the supervisory disconnect tone is detected on the FXO port, thesystem interprets this as a disconnect indication from the switch and clears thecall. Choose one of the following:

• dualtone—Disconnects calls when the router detects call-progress tonesfrom a PBX or the PSTN.

• anytone—Disconnects the call if the PBX or PSTN does not provide asupervisory tone. Examples of tones that trigger a disconnect include busytone, fast busy tone, and dial tone.

• signal—Enables a disconnect indication by detecting the power denial whichuses the LCFO signal on the remote end.

Supervisory Disconnect

Time-outs

Specifies when to disconnect the call. You can choose one of the following:

• timer—Specifies the duration to wait while the phone is ringing beforedisconnecting the call. Range is from 0 to 120 seconds.

• infinity—Disables disconnect supervision. The voice port does not disconnectwhen a disconnect tone is detected.

Call Disconnect

Specifies the number of seconds for which the systemwaits for the caller to inputthe first digit of the dialed digits. Range is from 0 to 120 seconds.

Initial Timeout

Configuring Power Denial drop-down list does not have affect on theFXO port.

Note

Sets the duration of the power denial that the voice gateway applies to the FXSport when a call disconnects. Range is from 0 to 2500 seconds.

Power Denial

Limits the time a voice port can be held in a call failure state. After the timeout,the release sequence is enabled. You can choose one of the following:

• timer—Range is from 1 to 3600 seconds.

• infinity—The voice port is never released as long as the call-failure stateremains.

Wait Release

NIM-2FXS/4FXO

DescriptionField

If you are using NIM-2FXS/4FXO, input the following details:

FXS

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide214

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 225: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Choose one of the following:

• Disabled—The line is inactive.

• Analog Phone—The line is connected to an analog phone.

• Paging—The line is connected to an external paging system.

• Automatic Ringdown—The line is connected to a phone that has a dedicatedconnection with another phone. When the phone connected to this line goesoff hook, the destination phone rings. There is no need to dial any number.

Type

Enter the label to identify each line.Label

Enter the extension number.Extension

This field is visible only when you choose "Automatic Ringdown"from the Type drop-down list.

Note

Enter the extension of the destination phone that rings when the phone goes offhook.

Destination

Choose one of the following Class of Restriction (COR):

• internal

• local

• local-plus

• national

• national-plus

• international

Class of Restriction decides the type of calls that can be placed from the FXSphone line.

Note • You must select the Class of Restriction (COR) for every linewhile adding FXS cards in the Setup Assistant.

• This field is available when you choose Analog Phone from the"Type" drop-down list.

Restrictions

Choose the type of algorithm used for modifying an input signal for digitization:

• u-law

• a-law

Law

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide215

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 226: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

The amount of amplification or deamplification of sound in terms of decibels.Range is from -6 to 14 db. Default value for FXO line is 0 db and for FXS lineis 6 db.

This field is available only while editing the line cards containing FXSand FXO lines. This field does not appear while adding the line cardduring initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant wizard) or postsite deployment (under Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) > Add NIMCard).

Note

Input Gain (db)

The value that is configured for minimizing the signal loss. Range is from -6 to14 db. Default value for FXO and FXS line is 0 db.

This field is available only while editing the line cards containing FXSand FXO lines. This field does not appear while adding the line cardduring initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant wizard) or postsite deployment (under Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) > Add NIMCard).

Note

Output Attenuation (db)

FXO

Choose one of the following:

• Disabled—The line is inactive.

• Trunk—The line is connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network.

• Paging—The line is connected to an external paging system.

Type

Enter the label name.Label

This field appears only when "Trunk" is chosen from the "Type"drop-down list.

Note

Enter a name for the trunk line.

Name

Enter the number for analog phone line.Extension

This field appears only when "Trunk" is chosen from the "Type"drop-down list.

Note

Enter the number for the trunk line.

Number

Choose one of the following:

• Ground

• Loop Start

Start Type

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide216

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 227: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Mark the line as incoming only or bidirectional. The system builds the trunkgroups based on what you select.

• In + Out—Allows the phone line to receive and make calls.

• Inbound Only—Allows the phone line to receive the calls.

Direction

Choose the type of algorithm used for modifying an input signal for digitization:

• u-law

• a-law

Law

The amount of amplification or deamplification of sound in terms of decibels.Range is from -6 to 14 db. Default value for FXO line is 0 db and for FXS lineis 6 db.

This field is available only while editing the line cards containing FXSand FXO lines. This field does not appear while adding the line cardduring initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant wizard) or postsite deployment (under Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) > Add NIMCard).

Note

Input Gain (db)

The value that is configured for minimizing the signal loss. Range is from -6 to14 db. Default value for FXO and FXS line is 0 db.

This field is available only while editing the line cards containing FXSand FXO lines. This field does not appear while adding the line cardduring initial site deployment (in the Setup Assistant wizard) or postsite deployment (under Manage Site > Line Cards (NIM) > Add NIMCard).

Note

Output Attenuation (db)

NIM-2BRI-NT/TE or NIM-4BRI-NT/TE

DescriptionField

If you are using NIM-2BRI-NT/TE or NIM-4BRI-NT/TE, input the following details:

Choose one of the following:

• Disabled—The line is inactive.

• Trunk—The line is connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network.

Type

Choose a service name from the drop-down list. The drop-down list contains thelist of service providers that you added in the DID page. Service name enteredhere is shared across all the lines or ports for the selected NIM type.

You cannot choose the same service provider for SIP and Line Cards.Note

Service Name

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide217

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 228: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

If your service provider requires that your line use a static Terminal EndpointIdentifier, enter the value between 0 and 63. If the field is left blank, the lineattempt to negotiate a TEI.

Static TEI

Choose whether you want your call setup to work based on overlap receiving.You can enable or disable this option. If your service provider does not use“enbloc” signaling, this option allows BE4000 to wait for additional digits to bereceived before the call is routed.

Overlap Receiving

Check the "Send Redirecting IE Number" check box to include the RedirectingNumber Information Element in the outbound Setupmessages. Leave uncheckedif you are not sure about your service provider supporting this feature.

Send Redirecting IENumber

Enter the ISDN SPID. Some service providers use service profile identifiers(SPIDs) to define the services subscribed to by the ISDN device that is accessingthe ISDN service provider. A SPID is usually a seven-digit phone number withsome optional numbers.

ISDN SPID

Choose amethod for TEI negotiation based on your service provider requirements.Setting a static TEI overrides TEI negotiation.

The default behavior is TEI to be negotiated on power-up. The following optionsare provided to preserve or remove a negotiated TEI when the interface is reset:

• Power Up and Remove

• Power Up and Preserve

• First Call and Remove

• First Call and Preserve

TEI Negotiation Method

NIM-1MFT-T1/E1, NIM-2MFT-T1/E1, or NIM-4MFT-T1/E1

DescriptionField

If you choose NIM-1MFT-T1/E1, NIM-2MFT-T1/E1, or NIM-4MFT-T1/E1, enter the following details:

Choose the card type based on your customer network requirement. E1 PRI ischosen by default. The available options are:

• T1 PR1

• E1 PRI

Card Type

Choose one of the following:

• Disabled—The line is inactive.

• Trunk—The line is connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network.

Type

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide218

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 229: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Choose a service name from the drop-down list. The drop-down list contains thelist of service providers that you added in the DID page. Service name enteredhere is shared across all the lines or ports for the selected NIM type.

You cannot choose the same service provider for SIP and Line Cards.Note

Service Name

Choose one of the following ISDN Service Provider PRI Switch Types:

• primary-4ess

• primary-5ess

• dms100

• primary-net5

• primary-ni

“primary-4ess” is chosen by default.

ISDN Switch Type

Defines the controller setup for configuring channelized T1 or E1 controllers.Choose either Full PRI or partial PRI.

Controller Setup

Choose a line code. By default, the line code for E1 PRI is high-density bipolar3 (hdb3).

Line Code

Choose the framing from the drop-down list. This option defines the framingcharacteristics.

Framing

Check the "Send Redirecting IE Number" check box to include the RedirectingNumber Information Element in the outbound Setupmessages. Leave uncheckedif you are not sure about your service provider supporting this feature.

Send Redirecting IENumber

Private IP Ranges

IP addresses used for provisioning the phones must be allowed in RFC 1918 (10.0.0.8 /16, 172.16.0.0 /12,192.168.0.0 /16). If the IP address that is used for provisioning phone is other than the ones allowed in RFC1918, the phone provisioning fails. To avoid such phone provisioning issues, you must enter the IP addressesin the Private IP Ranges page. You can add individual IP address (host address) in the x.x.x.x format or anIP address range (subnet) in the x.x.x.x /n format.

Click Add Row and add private IP address ranges one by one.

Dial Plan Field DescriptionsRegion Settings Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Choose your home country. This is used to display the date, time, currency, andother dial plan tones and numbers.

Telephony Port Tones

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide219

Setup AssistantDial Plan Field Descriptions

Page 230: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Choose your relevant time zone. Typically, your time zone is linked to the areacode of your main company number. For example, for area code 919 (RTP),the time zone defaults to Pacific Time.

Time Zone

Choose your phone display language as the default language used for all accountsand notifications from the drop-down list.

Phone Display Language

Select the country to define dial tone for your phones.Phone Tones

Select the language in which you want to receive your phone greetings.Voicemail and SystemPrompt Language

Select the language preference for your customers self care portal.Selfcare Portal

Select the time format as 12-or 24 hour. For example, the default format for theUnited States is 12 hours.

Time Format

Select the date format to suit your needs. For example, the default format forthe United States is MM/DD/YY.

Date Format

Enables or disables the automatic adjustment of daylight saving time on yourphones.

DST Auto Adjust

Dial Plans Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Choose the country and locale that you want for yoursystem.

Country

Select the option for local dialing as per customerrequirement. The local area length value depends onthe regulation set up by the service providers in yourregion.

Local Dialling Options

Enter a valid “Local Area Code” for your mainnumber. This field appears based on the local dialingoption selected.

Local Area Code

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide220

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 231: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Choose the class of restriction for the dialing patternsbelonging to a dial plan. Choose one of the followingoptions from the drop-down list for COR column:

• internal

• local

• local-plus

• national

• national-plus

• international

COR

Choose the preference for the selected dialing patternsbelonging to a dial plan. Choose one of the followingoptions from the drop-down list for Preferencecolumn:

• POTSthenSIP

• SIPthenPOTS

• SIPOnly

• POTSOnly

The "Preference" is set to "SIPthenPOTS" by default.The "Preference" for call-emergency patterns is setto "POTSthenSIP" by default.

Preference

Stations Field DescriptionsStations Field Descriptions

You can enter the user details in two ways:

• Click “Add Row” and add the user details one by one.

• Download the template that is provided on the screen. Fill in the details and upload all users' details inone go.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide221

Setup AssistantStations Field Descriptions

Page 232: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Choose a type of user:

• User—An extension assigned to the user. You must configure an email addressassociated with the user.

• Public—An extension assigned to a phone that is meant for general use by manyusers. You need not configure an email address. For example, the extension assignedto a phone in the conference room.

Type

Enter the first name of the user.First Name

Enter the last name of the user.Last Name

Enter the display name of the user. The name entered here is displayed on the phonealong with the extension number. You can enter a maximum of 12 characters.

Display Name

Enter the email address of the user. The top-level domain in the email address cancontain up to six characters.

Email address must not be more than 32 characters in length. Only letters,numbers, and the characters underscore (_), dot (.), and dash (-) are allowedin the user ID portion of the email address. Do not use spaces in the emailaddress.

Note

Email

Enter the extension number assigned to the user.

Note • Enter a minimum of 3 digits for an extension. Maximum number ofdigits in an extension can go up to 5.

• You cannot create an extension with leading zero.

• The first digit of the extension cannot be the same as the digit used fordialing an outside line, sending a call to voicemail automatically, anddialing an intercom extension.

Extension

Choose the phone model associated with the extension. For the list of supported phonemodels, refer to “Supported Phones” section in the Cisco Business Edition 4000 ReleaseNotes.

Phone Type

Choose the Class of Restriction (COR) for the extension. COR allows you to chooseone of the calling privileges:

• internal

• local

• local-plus

• national

• national-plus

• international

COR

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide222

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 233: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Enable or disable voicemail functionality.Voicemail

Enter the Single Number Reach (SNR) number for an extension.

SNR allows you to answer the incoming calls on the desk phone or from amobile phone.You can also swap active calls on a desk phone or at a remote destination withoutdisconnecting the call. You should include the area code and any additional digits thatare required to obtain an outside line prefix to your destination number. Example—If9 is the digit to dial outside line, 1 is the country code, 555 is the area code, and 9999999is the subscriber number, you must enter 915559999999.

SNR

Deletes an entry.Delete

Replace an exiting list with an entirely new list.Replace this list

Add more rows to populate the stations list.Add Row

Allows you to download a customized template. Template should be of .csv format.DownloadTemplate

Call Routing Field DescriptionsBusiness Hours

Business hours are the hours during the day in which business is commonly conducted. BE4000 allows youset weekly schedule for open hours and yearly holidays when the business is closed.

DescriptionField

Select one of the following options:

• 24/7 (No closed hours) - You can upload one audio file that is played forall calls received during 24/7.

• Dual Hours (Open and Closed) - You can upload different audio files forthe calls received during open and closed hours.

Open Business Hours

When you select Dual Hours (Open and Closed), the following menu is displayed:

DescriptionField

Customize your business hours for your various departments. You can specifythe open hours for each day of the week.

Youmust enter time in 24-hour format only (17:00 for example). Timemust be either full (:00) or half hours (:30).

Note

Hours of Operation

Custom hours let you add and specify hours for each day of the week.Add Open Hours

Set up your holiday list.Holiday

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide223

Setup AssistantCall Routing Field Descriptions

Page 234: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Add the list of holidays for the organization.

Note • You can add holidays only for the current year and a year ahead.

• Date should not be less than the present date.

Add New Holiday

Hunt Group

Hunt Groups allow incoming calls to a specific number (pilot number) to be directed to a defined group ofextension numbers. Incoming calls are redirected from the pilot number to the first extension number asdefined in the configuration. If the first number is busy or does not answer, the call is redirected to the nextphone in the list. A call remains redirected on busy or no answer from number to number in the list until it isanswered or until the call reaches the number that is defined as the final number.

A Hunt Group can have static and dynamic members.

• Static Members—Permanent members belonging to the Hunt Group.

• Dynamic Members—Not the permanent members, but they can join or unjoin a Hunt Group on a needbasis using the softkeys available on the phone.

• You can add a maximum of 20 Hunt Groups.

• The total number of members in a Hunt Group, including static and dynamic members cannot exceed32.

• If you check the "Allow dynamic members" check box on theHunt Groups page, ensure that you checkthe "Hunt Group Login" check box for each dynamicmember extension underManage Site > Extensions> Basic Info page.

• Once a Hunt Group is created, you cannot modify the Hunt Method. You have to delete and readd theHunt Group to modify the Hunt Method.

Note

Hunt Group Field Descriptions

Suggestions for Setting Up Hunt Group Timers

The Hunt Group page does not load any default values. You must set the values for the following fields basedon the selected Hunt Method.

• Member Timeout

• Comfort Greeting Frequency

• Max Waiting Time

For effective inbound call handling and providing a positive experience for inbound callers, we recommendyou to set the timers as per the following calculations:

Example for Parallel Hunt Method

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide224

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 235: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Set the Comfort Greeting Frequency as two times the value of Member Timeout and the Max Waiting Timeas the value equal to that of Member Timeout.

Member Timeout = 30 seconds

Comfort Greeting Frequency = 2 x Member Timeout = 2 x 30 = 60 seconds

Max Waiting Time = Member Timeout = 30 seconds

Example for Peer, Sequential, and Longest Idle Hunt Methods

Set the Comfort Greeting Frequency as two times the value of Member Timeout and the Max Waiting Timeas Member Timeout value multiplied by the number of members in the Hunt Group.

Members in the Hunt Group = 5

Member Timeout = 30 seconds

Comfort Greeting Frequency = 2 x Member Timeout = 2 x 30 = 60 seconds

Max Waiting Time = Number of Members x Member Timeout = 5 x 30 = 150 seconds

DescriptionField

Enter a unique name for the hunt list. To easily identify the hunt list,consider appending the pilot extension to the name; for example, hl5001.Group name must contain a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 12characters.

Only the following characters are allowed: a-z, A-Z, 0-9,space, hyphen(-), and underscore (_)

Note

Group Name

Enter a number to access the Hunt Group that serves as the pilot for thehunt list. This number serves as the trigger for hunting to begin. Pilotnumber can be any number equal to the length of extension. For example:

• If the extension length is 3, pilot number can be any number from000 to 999

• If the extension length is 4, pilot number can be any number from0000 to 9999

• If the extension length is 5, pilot number can be any number from00000 to 99999

Note • The Pilot Number of the Hunt Groups cannot be thesame as any existing extension and cannot start with thedigit that is used for sending calls to voicemailautomatically and for placing intercom calls.

• The Pilot Number of the Hunt Groups cannot be thesame as any existing Pickup Group number.

Pilot Number

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide225

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 236: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Click Add to add members to this hunt group from the Stations page(ShowMember Directory). You can also search for the users by enteringmember name or extension. All extensions that are assigned to users ordepartments can be included as members of a Hunt Group. You mustadd a minimum of two members (can include dynamic members) for ahunt group.

Add Members

From the list of extensions that display, select which extensions mustbe included in the hunt list.

Click Show Member Directory, to select the list of extensions for thehunt list. Check the respective member's name and click OK.

Show Member Directory

Allows members that are not part of the Hunt Group to join and unjointhe Hunt Group on a need basis using the softkeys displayed on thescreen.

Allow dynamic members

This field is visible only when "Allow dynamic members" ischecked.

Note

Number of dynamic members allowed for the hunt group. A minimumof one dynamic member needs to be added.

Note • You can add a maximum of 20 Hunt Groups.

• The total number of members in a Hunt Group, includingstatic and dynamic members cannot exceed 32.

• If you check the "Allow dynamic members" check boxon the Hunt Groups page, ensure that you check the"Hunt Group Login" check box for each dynamicmember extension under Manage Site > Extensions >Basic Info page.

• Once a Hunt Group is created, you cannot modify theHunt Method. You have to delete and readd the HuntGroup to modify the Hunt Method.

Max dynamic members

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide226

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 237: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Select how BE4000 distributes the calls to members of the hunt listbased on one of the following hunt methods:

• Longest-idle—BE4000 only distributes a call to idle members,starting from the longest idle member to the least idle member ofa hunt list.

• Parallel—Calls ring all numbers in that hunt group simultaneously.The extension to first answer the call is connected.

• Sequential—Call hunting always starts with the first member inthe hunt group. Continues to each number in the group in the orderin which they are listed, from top to bottom, in the hunt group.

• Peer—Call hunting starts with the extension immediately after theone that last rang. Ringing proceeds in a circular manner, that isfrom left to right. That is, BE4000 distributes a call to idle oravailable members starting from the (n+1)th member of a hunt list,where the nth member is the member to which BE4000 mostrecently extended a call. If the nth member is the last member ofa hunt list, BE4000 distributes a call starting from the top of thehunt list.

Once a Hunt Group is created, you cannot modify the HuntMethod. You have to delete and readd the Hunt Group tomodify the Hunt Method.

Note

Hunt Method

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide227

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 238: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

If no members of the hunt list are available to answer a call, you canchoose to perform one of the following:

• Disconnect Call—the call is disconnected.

• Route to Group Voicemail Box—the call is forwarded to a groupvoicemail box. Enter the email address and extension associatedwith the group voicemail box. Group Voicemail boxes are createdwith the first member of the hunt group as the user owner of thegroup.

Note • During initial deployment, a group voicemail boxis created including the members who are availablein the Hunt Group.

• When adding Hunt Group post site deployment,ensure that you create a group voicemail box first.Else, the drop-down list does not show "Route toGroup Voicemail Box" option.

• Route to Hunt Groups—the call is forward to another Hunt Group.Select the Hunt Group from the drop-down list.

• Route to Other—the call is forwarded to any other number, suchas extensions.

• Route to Voicemail Box—the call is forwarded to the voicemailbox of a user.

When No Member is Available

Timer Settings

Enter the maximum time for a member's phone to wait before passingthe call to the other member's phone. This happens only for longest-idle,sequential, and peer hunt methods. The range is from 3 to 60,000seconds.

Member Timeout (3-60000 Sec)

Enables call queueing.Enable Call Queuing

This field is visible only when Enable Call Queuing checkbox is checked.

Note

Set the frequency in which the pre-recorded voice message (comfortgreeting) is played while the callers wait in the queue. The range is from30 to 120 seconds.

Comfort Greeting frequency(30-120 Sec)

This field is visible only when Enable Call Queuing checkbox is checked.

Note

Enter the maximum time to wait when the queue is busy or full beforerouting the call to "When No Member is Available " destination. Therange is from 20 to 3600 seconds.

Max Waiting Time (20-3600 Sec)

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide228

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 239: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Save your hunt group configuration settings.Save

Auto Attendant

Auto Attendant service (also referred to as a virtual receptionist), is a phone system that enables your callersto be automatically transferred to an extension, eliminating the need for a receptionist and avoiding extendedwaiting period. BE4000 provides you an automated phone answering facility to communicate effectively withcustomers and improve your business operations. An auto attendant answers all incoming calls with an audiogreeting and options menu (different for open and closed hours). A maximum of five submenus with amaximum depth of 3 levels can be configured. The caller can select a menu option to reach to the desiredextension.

You can define the number of times the menu options is played to the caller before the call reaches the dropthrough destination. You can also define where the call lands if no action is performed by the caller even afterthe defined number menu repetitions.

Auto Attendant Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter the number that callers dial to reach auto attendant. A minimumof four digits is required. Range is from 1000 to 9999.

Pilot Number

Number of times the audio file is played to the caller before the callreaches the drop through destination. Value range is from 1 to 9. Defaultvalue is 4.

How many times do you wantmessage to be played

Defines where the call lands if no action is performed by the caller evenafter playing the menu for the defined number of repeats. You canconfigure one of the following as the drop through destination:

• Route to Extension—All extensions are listed in the drop-down.

• Route to Voicemail Box—All extensions that have "Voicemail"enabled are listed in the drop-down.

• Route to Hunt Group—All Hunt Groups are listed in thedrop-down.

• Route to Group Voicemail Box—All group voicemail boxes arelisted in the drop-down.

During the initial site deployment (in the SetupAssistant), the drop-down shows an option, only if youcreate a group voicemail box on theHunt Groups page,by choosing "Route to Group Voicemail Box" from theWhen No Member is Available drop-down list.

Note

• Disconnect Call—The call gets disconnected.

Drop Through Destination

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide229

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 240: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Add an audio prompt for welcome Message. The BE4000 provides adefault audio file. This audio message is played first when a call isanswered by the auto attendant. You can also upload a new .wav file.To select a new file, click Upload.

BE4000 supports only .wav audio file with G.711 u-law,8kHz, 8 bit, Mono format. The file cannot be larger than 1MB (about 2 minutes). The filename cannot have space andspecial characters.

The system default message is a silent recording. You needto replace the message with a custom recording.

Note

Audio Prompt (WelcomeMessage)

Add an audio prompt for open message. The BE4000 provides a defaultaudio file. This audio message is played when a call is answered duringthe open business hours. You can also upload a new .wav file. To selecta new file, click Upload.

BE4000 supports only .wav audio file with G.711 u-law,8kHz, 8 bit, Mono format. The file cannot be larger than 1MB (about 2 minutes). The filename cannot have space andspecial characters.

The system default message is a silent recording. You needto replace the message with a custom recording.

Note

Audio Prompt (Open Message)

Add customizedmenu options. You can add 0-9menu options in additionto a * menu. Each menu option can be labeled in a meaningful way tohelp identify locations or users in your system using any one of thefollowing: Dial by Name, Pilot Number, Dial by Number, Call HuntGroup, Return to Main Menu, or Submenu.

Add Menu Option

Displays the default audio file that is played for all calls received duringclosed hours. You can play the existing file or upload a new .wav file.To select a new audio file, click Upload.

BE4000 supports only .wav audio file with G.711 u-law,8kHz, 8 bit, Mono format. The file cannot be larger than 1MB (about 2 minutes). The filename cannot have space andspecial characters.

The system default message is a silent recording. You needto replace the message with a custom recording.

Note

Audio Prompt (Closed Message)

Add customizedmenu options. You can add 0-9menu options in additionto a * menu. Each menu option can be labeled in a meaningful way tohelp identify locations or users in your system using any one of thefollowing: Dial by Name, Pilot Number, Dial by Number, Call HuntGroup, Return to Main Menu, or Submenu.

Add Menu Option

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide230

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 241: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Night Service

Night service allows you to transfer the incoming calls to a designated set of extensions during closed hours.During the night service hours (also known as closed hours), calls coming in to the designated extension,known as night service extensions, sends a special "burst" ring to night-service phones (phones that receivethe calls coming from the night service extension) that have been specified to receive the special ring. Phoneusers at the night-service phones can then answer the incoming calls for the night-service extensions.

You can configure only one night-service phone per night-service extension.Note

Night Service Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Enter a code to trigger Night Service feature manually during openbusiness hours.

Manual Activation Code must start with an asterisk (*) followed by aminimum of 3 digits. A maximum of 15 digits can be configuredexcluding the asterisk (*). Default value for manual activation code is*1234.

Manual Activation Code

Enter the hours during which the Night Service must be active.

You cannot overlap the end time of Night Service and the start ofbusiness open hours. For example, if your business closes at 17:00 andopens next day at 09:00 AM, enter the Night Service hours as 17:00 and08:59. You cannot enter 09:00 as it overlaps with the open businesshours. Night service hours must be entered in 24-hour time format.

Active Hours

Add the list of holidays for the organization.

Note • You can add holidays only for the current year and ayear ahead.

• Date should not be less than the present date.

Holidays

After enabling night service, you must the extensions for night service hours and to receive night service calls.Refer Night Service section for more details.

Note

Inbound Call Mapping

You can map the incoming calls of a DID number to an Auto Attendant, Extension, or Hunt Group. You canalso set a default target for all the DID numbers belonging to a service provider.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide231

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 242: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Inbound Call Mapping Field Descriptions

DescriptionsField

Names of the service providers are listed by default.Service Provider

Choose a default target for all incoming calls belonging to a service provider. Ifthere is a registered number that is not assigned with any target type, then theincoming calls are place on the default target set for the service provider.

Choose one of the following: Hunt Group, Auto Attendant, Extension.

Default Target

Specify the number of digits sent by the service provider. Range is from 2 to 15and All Digits.

Provider Send Digits

The DID numbers that are registered to SIP Trunk and Line Cards are listed bydefault.

Registered Number

Choose one of the following:

• Auto Attendant—You can map the incoming calls on the DID number tothe Auto Attendant. The Auto Attendant menu options is played when thecallers dial the DID number. You choose one of the following as the targetnumber:

• Auto Attendant Pilot Number—Choose pilot number of the AutoAttendant.

• Greeting Admin—You can assign a Direct Inward Dial (DID) numberas the number to log in the Auto Attendant Alternate admin settings.The customer administrator (or an end user with"PromptAdministrators" privileges), can dial the DID number insteadof 70397 to reach the Auto Attendant admin settings on the phone.

• Extension—You can select any one of the existing extensions. The incomingcalls on the DID number ring on the specified extension.

• Hunt Group—You can map the incoming calls on the DID number to anexisting hunt group. The incoming calls on the DID numbers ring on theextensions belonging to the specified hunt group.

• Meet Me—You can map the incoming calls on the DID number to a MeetMe conference number. The incoming calls on the DID numbers ring onthe Meet Me conference numbers that you configure.

Target Type

Choose a number from the drop-down list.Target Number

Outbound Caller ID

You can configure a specific DID number to be displayed on the called phone when an outbound call is placedfrom an extension within the organization. You can also set a default outbound DID number for a serviceprovider.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide232

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 243: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Outbound Caller ID Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Names of the service providers are listed by default.Service Provider

Choose a default target for all outgoing calls of the service provider. An extensionwithout an assigned DID number displays the default outbound DID numberconfigured for the service provider.

Default Outbound DID

Displays the list of extensions available for the site.Mapped Extension

Choose a DID number to be displayed on the called phone when an outboundcall is placed from the extension within the organization.

Caller ID

System Operator

You can configure a number to be reached when a caller dials zero after listening to the personal voicemailbox greeting.

System Operator Field Descriptions

DescriptionField

Choose the one of the following as the system operator target type from theTarget Type drop-down list:

• Route to Extension—Any extension that is configured for the site.

• Route to Voicemail Box—Voicemail of any extension.

• Route to Hunt Group—Any hunt group that is configured for the site.

• Route to GroupVoicemail Box—Any group voicemail box that is configuredfor the site.

• Route to Pilot Number—Any pilot number, such as Auto Attendant pilotnumber.

Target Type

Choose the number corresponding to the target type selected from the TargetNumber drop-down list.

Target Number

Features Field DescriptionsPaging

Paging provides one-way voice path to the phones that have been designated to receive paging. The pagedphone automatically answers the page in speakerphone mode with “Mute” activated.

By default, the BE4000 system creates a "PageAll" group that consists of all phones available in the site.

Click Add New Paging Group to add custom paging groups.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide233

Setup AssistantFeatures Field Descriptions

Page 244: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

DescriptionField

Name of the paging group. Enter a minimum of 2 anda maximum of 30 characters.

Only 0-9 a-z A-Z !#%,-./=_? are allowed.Note

Group Name

Number that is designated to relay audio pages. PilotNumber must contain same number of digits as thatof the extension length.

The first digit cannot be the same as thedigit used for dialing an outside line,sending a call to voicemail automatically,and dialing an intercom extension.

Note

Pilot Number

List of members in the paging group. Search for themembers using the username or extension. You canalso search for the members using the "ShowDirectory" option.

Add Members

Creates a paging group or saves the changes that aremade to an existing paging group.

Save

Music on Hold Settings

DescriptionField

MoH allows you to play audio for incoming and outgoing calls placed on hold.You can play the default audio file or upload a new audio file. To select a newaudio file, click Upload.

BE4000 supports only .au and .wav audio file with G.711; ITU-Ta-law or u-law, 8kHz, 8 bit, Mono format. The file cannot be largerthan 1 MB (about 2 minutes). The filename cannot have space andspecial characters.

Note

Music on Hold (MoH)

Maintenance Schedule Field Descriptions

Maintenance Schedule allows you to designate a 2 hour block of time each day when it is safe for the systemto install software updates. The system may be offline and unable to make or receive phone calls during themaintenance schedule. Select the day and time according to your organization’s preference.

You can also back up your site configurations on a regular interval. You can set the day and time during whichthe system automatically backs up your site configuration. Check the "Back Up" check box for the days whenyou want the site to back up the configurations.

The previous five consecutive backups are stored in the BE4000 portal.Note

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide234

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 245: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Licensing

You can associate the site with the Cisco Smart Account by providing the smart license token. The SmartLicense Token field is a placeholder for entering the smart license token ID. Currently, the BE4000 does notregister to the Cisco Smart Account. If you enter a smart license token ID, we recommend setting a validitydate of at least 180 days when the token is created. Enter the smart license token ID received from Cisco inthe Smart License Token field.

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide235

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant

Page 246: Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide · CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 New and Changed Information 1 NewandChangedInformation 1 CHAPTER 2 Overview of Cisco Business Edition 4000 25

Cisco Business Edition 4000 Partner Guide236

Setup AssistantSetup Assistant